Pioneer Pdp-5020fd SM

ORDER NO.
ARP3476
PDP-5020FD
FLAT PANEL TV
PDP-5020FD
THIS MANUAL IS APPLICABLE TO THE FOLLOWING MODEL(S) AND TYPE(S).
Model Type Power Requirement Remarks
PDP-5020FD KUCXC AC 120 V
For details, refer to "Important Check Points for good servicing".
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. Box 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.
PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, 9120 Melsele, Belgium
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
PIONEER CORPORATION 2008
T-IZS-001 MAY 2008 Printed in Japan
1 2 3 4
SAFETY INFORMATION
This service manual is intended for qualified service technicians ; it is not meant for the casual
do-it-yourselfer. Qualified technicians have the necessary test equipment and tools, and have been
trained to properly and safely repair complex products such as those covered by this manual.
Improperly performed repairs can adversely affect the safety and reliability of the product and may
void the warranty. If you are not qualified to perform the repair of this product properly and safely,
you should not risk trying to do so and refer the repair to a qualified service technician.
WARNING
B This product contains lead in solder and certain electrical parts contain chemicals which are known to the state of California to
cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Health & Safety Code Section 25249.6 - Proposition 65
NOTICE
(FOR CANADIAN MODEL ONLY)
Fuse symbols (fast operating fuse) and/or (slow operating fuse) on PCB indicate that replacement parts must
be of identical designation.
REMARQUE
(POUR MODÈLE CANADIEN SEULEMENT)
Les symboles de fusible (fusible de type rapide) et/ou (fusible de type lent) sur CCI indiquent que les pièces
C
de remplacement doivent avoir la même désignation.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
NOTICE : Comply with all cautions and safety related notes 6. Perform the following precautions against unwanted radiation
located on or inside the cabinet and on the chassis. and rise in internal temperature.
The following precautions should be observed : • Always return the internal wiring to the original styling.
1. When service is required, even though the PDP UNIT an • Attach parts (Gascket, Ferrite Core, Ground, Rear Cover,
D
isolation transformer should be inserted between the power line Shield Case etc.) surely after disassembly.
and the set in safety before any service is performed. 7. Perform the following precautions for the PDP panel.
2. When replacing a chassis in the set, all the protective devices • When the front case is removed, make sure nothing hits the
must be put back in place, such as barriers, nonmetallic knobs, panel face, panel corner, and panel edge (so that the glass does
adjustment and compartment covershields, isolation resistor- not break).
capacitor, etc. • Make sure that the panel vent does not break. (Check that the
3. When service is required, observe the original lead dress. Extra cover is attached.)
precaution should be taken to assure correct lead dress in the • Handle the FPC connected to the panel carefully.
high voltage circuitry area. Twisting or pulling the FPC when connecting it to the
4. Always use the manufacture's replacement components. connector will cause it to peel off from the panel.
Especially critical components as indicated on the circuit 8. Pay attention to the following.
diagram should not be replaced by other manufacture's. • Pay extreme caution when the front case and rear panel are
E
Furthermore where a short circuit has occurred, replace those removed because this may cause a high risk of disturbance to
components that indicate evidence of overheating. TVs and radios in the surrounding.
5. Before returning a serviced set to the customer, the service
technician must thoroughly test the unit to be certain that it is
completely safe to operate without danger of electrical shock,
and be sure that no protective device built into the set by the
manufacture has become defective, or inadvertently defeated
during servicing. Therefore, the following checks should be
performed for the continued protection of the customer and
servicetechnician.
2 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Leakage Current Cold Check PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE
With the AC plug removed from an AC power source, place a Many electrical and mechanical parts in PIONEER set have
jumper across the two plug prongs. Turn the AC power switch on. special safety related characteristics. These are often not evident
Using an insulation tester (DC 500V), connect one lead to the from visual inspection nor the protection afforded by them
jumpered AC plug and touch the other lead to each exposed metal necessarily can be obtained by using replacement components
part (input/output terminals, screwheads, metal overlays, control rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which
shafts, etc.), particularly any exposed metal part having a return have these special safety characteristics are identified in this
path to the chassis. Exposed metal parts having a return path to Service Manual.
the chassis should have a minimum resistor reading of 4 MΩ. Electrical components having such features are identified by
The below 4 MΩ resistor value indicate an abnormality which marking with a > on the schematics and on the parts list in this
require corrective action. Exposed metal parts not having a return Service Manual.
path to the chassis will indicate an open circuit. The use of a substitute replacement component which dose not B
have the same safety characteristics as the PIONEER
Leakage Current Hot Check recommended replacement one, shown in the parts list in this
Plug the AC line cord directly into an AC power source (do not Service Manual, may create shock, fire or other hazards.
use an isolation transformer for this check). Product Safety is continuously under review and new instructions
Turn the AC power switch on. are issued from time to time. For the latest information, always
U s i n g a " L e a k a g e C u r r e n t Te s t e r ( S i m p s o n M o d e l 2 2 9 consult the current PIONEER Service Manual. A subscription to,
equivalent)", measure for current from all exposed metal parts of or additional copies of, PIONEER Service Manual may be
the cabinet (input/output terminals, screwheads, metal overlays, obtained at a nominal charge from PIONEER.
control shaft, etc.), particularly any exposed metal part having a
return path to the chassis, to a known earth ground (water pipe,
conduit, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 1 mA.
C
Reading should
Leakage not be above
Device current 1 mA
under tester
test
Test all
exposed metal
surfaces
D
Also test with

plug reversed Earth
(Using AC adapter ground
plug as required)
AC Leakage Test
A N Y M E A S U R E M E N T S N OT W I T H I N T H E L I M I T S
OUTLINED ABOVE ARE INDICATIVE OF A POTENTIAL
SHOCK HAZARD AND MUST BE CORRECTED BEFORE
RETURNING THE SET TO THE CUSTOMER.
PDP-5020FD 3
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[Important Check Points for Good Servicing]
In this manual, procedures that must be performed during repairs are marked with the below symbol.
Please be sure to confirm and follow these procedures.
1. Product safety
Please conform to product regulations (such as safety and radiation regulations), and maintain a safe servicing environment by
following the safety instructions described in this manual.
1 Use specified parts for repair.
Use genuine parts. Be sure to use important parts for safety.
2 Do not perform modifications without proper instructions.

B
Please follow the specified safety methods when modification(addition/change of parts) is required due to interferences such as
radio/TV interference and foreign noise.
3 Make sure the soldering of repaired locations is properly performed.
When you solder while repairing, please be sure that there are no cold solder and other debris.
Soldering should be finished with the proper quantity. (Refer to the example)
4 Make sure the screws are tightly fastened.
Please be sure that all screws are fastened, and that there are no loose screws.
5 Make sure each connectors are correctly inserted.
Please be sure that all connectors are inserted, and that there are no imperfect insertion.
C
6 Make sure the wiring cables are set to their original state.
Please replace the wiring and cables to the original state after repairs.
In addition, be sure that there are no pinched wires, etc.
7 Make sure screws and soldering scraps do not remain inside the product.
Please check that neither solder debris nor screws remain inside the product.
8 There should be no semi-broken wires, scratches, melting, etc. on the coating of the power cord.
Damaged power cords may lead to fire accidents, so please be sure that there are no damages.
If you find a damaged power cord, please exchange it with a suitable one.
9 There should be no spark traces or similar marks on the power plug.

D
When spark traces or similar marks are found on the power supply plug, please check the connection and advise on secure
connections and suitable usage. Please exchange the power cord if necessary.
a Safe environment should be secured during servicing.
When you perform repairs, please pay attention to static electricity, furniture, household articles, etc. in order to prevent injuries.
Please pay attention to your surroundings and repair safely.
2. Adjustments
To keep the original performance of the products, optimum adjustments and confirmation of characteristics within specification.
Adjustments should be performed in accordance with the procedures/instructions described in this manual.
E
3. Lubricants, Glues, and Replacement parts
Use grease and adhesives that are equal to the specified substance.
Make sure the proper amount is applied.
4. Cleaning
For parts that require cleaning, such as optical pickups, tape deck heads, lenses and mirrors used in projection monitors, proper
cleaning should be performed to restore their performances.
5. Shipping mode and Shipping screws

F To protect products from damages or failures during transit, the shipping mode should be set or the shipping screws should be
installed before shipment. Please be sure to follow this method especially if it is specified in this manual.
4 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
CONTENTS
SAFETY INFORMATION.......................................................................................................................................................... 2
1. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.1 NOTES ON SOLDERING ............................................................................................................................................... 6 A
1.2 CHARGED SECTION AND HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING POINT ............................................................................. 7
2. SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.1 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................................ 10
2.3 PANEL FACILITIES....................................................................................................................................................... 12
3. BASIC ITEMS FOR SERVICE ............................................................................................................................................ 16
3.1 CHECK POINTS AFTER SERVICING ......................................................................................................................... 16
3.2 QUICK REFERENCE ................................................................................................................................................... 17
3.3 PCB LOCATIONS ......................................................................................................................................................... 19
3.4 JIGS LIST ..................................................................................................................................................................... 20
4. BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
4.1 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2) ............................................................................................................................. 22
B
4.2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2) ............................................................................................................................. 24
4.3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) .............................................................................................................................. 26
4.4 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) .............................................................................................................................. 28
4.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................................................................ 30
4.6 50F X DRIVE ASSY...................................................................................................................................................... 32
4.7 50F Y DRIVE, 50F SCAN A and B ASSYS .................................................................................................................. 33
4.8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of 50F X, Y DRIVE and 50F SCAN A and B ASSYS ......................................................... 34
4.9 50F ADDRESS L and S ASSYS................................................................................................................................... 35
4.10 50F DIGITAL ASSY .................................................................................................................................................... 36
4.11 MAIN ASSY (DTV BLOCK DIAGRAM)....................................................................................................................... 37
4.12 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of MAIN ASSY.................................................................................................................. 38
4.13 IO_AUDIO ASSY ........................................................................................................................................................ 40
4.14 LED and IR ASSYS .................................................................................................................................................... 42 C
5. DIAGNOSIS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 43
5.1 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION.................................................................................................................................... 43
5.2 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART OF FAILURE ANALYSIS .................................................................................................. 49
5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN)......................................................................................................................... 72
5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN) ............................................................................................................................. 76
5.5 NON-FAILURE INFORMATION .................................................................................................................................... 80
5.6 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. 82
5.7 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND ............................................................................................................................ 87
5.8 LIST OF RS-232C COMMANDS .................................................................................................................................. 88
5.9 DETAILS OF EACH COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................ 97
6. SERVICE FACTORY MODE ............................................................................................................................................. 111
6.1 OUTLINE OF THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE ........................................................................................................ 111 D
6.2 DETAILS OF FACTORY MENU .................................................................................................................................. 119
6.3 DIGITAL TUNER SERVICE MENU............................................................................................................................. 144
7. DISASSEMBLY ................................................................................................................................................................. 146
7.1 FLOWCHART OF REMOVAL ORDER ....................................................................................................................... 146
7.2 DISASSEMBLY........................................................................................................................................................... 147
7.3 PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM................................................................................................................ 157
8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................................. 158
8.1 ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED WHEN THE UNIT IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED ........................................................ 158
8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY)........................................................................................................... 161
8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA .............................................................................................................................. 164
8.4 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED ....................................................................... 165
8.5 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED.................................................................................. 176 E
8.6 HOW TO UPDATE USB.............................................................................................................................................. 179
8.7 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE MAIN OR IO_AUDIO ASSY IS REPLACED.................................................................. 181
9. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST............................................................................................................................. 182
9.1 PACKING SECTION ................................................................................................................................................... 182
9.2 REAR SECTION......................................................................................................................................................... 184
9.3 FRONT SECTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 186
9.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)........................................................................................................................................... 188
9.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2)........................................................................................................................................... 190
9.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION....................................................................................................................................... 192
9.7 MULTIBASE SECTION............................................................................................................................................... 194
9.8 PDP SERVICE ASSY ................................................................................................................................................. 196
9.9 TABLE TOP STAND.................................................................................................................................................... 198
F
9.10 SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING) .............................................................................................................................. 199
9.11 SPEAKER SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................. 200
PDP-5020FD 5
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
1. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
1.1 NOTES ON SOLDERING
A
• For environmental protection, lead-free solder is used on the printed circuit boards mounted in this unit.
Be sure to use lead-free solder and a soldering iron that can meet specifications for use with lead-free solders for repairs
accompanied by reworking of soldering.
• Compared with conventional eutectic solders, lead-free solders have higher melting points, by approximately 40 ºC.
Therefore, for lead-free soldering, the tip temperature of a soldering iron must be set to around 373 ºC in general, although
the temperature depends on the heat capacity of the PC board on which reworking is required and the weight of the tip of
the soldering iron.
Do NOT use a soldering iron whose tip temperature cannot be controlled.
B Compared with eutectic solders, lead-free solders have higher bond strengths but slower wetting times and higher melting
temperatures (hard to melt/easy to harden).
The following lead-free solders are available as service parts:

• Parts numbers of lead-free solder:
GYP1006 1.0 in dia.
GYP1007 0.6 in dia.
GYP1008 0.3 in dia.
6 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
1.2 CHARGED SECTION AND HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING POINT
A
Charged Section High Voltage Generating Point
The places where the commercial AC power is used without The places where voltage is 100 V or more except for the charged
passing through the power supply transformer. places described above. If the places are touched, there is a risk of
If the places are touched, there is a risk of electric shock. In electric shock.
addition, the measuring equipment can be damaged if it is The VSUS voltage remains for several minutes after the power to
connected to the GND of the charged section and the GND of the the unit is turned off. These places must not be touched until
non-charged section while connecting the set directly to the about 10 minutes after the power is turned off, or it is confirmed
commercial AC power supply. Therefore, be sure to connect the with a tester that there is no residual VSUS voltage.
set via an insulated transformer and supply the current.
If the procedures described in “5.6 [1] PANEL DRIVE-POWER
1. Power Cord ON/OFF FUNCTION” are performed before the power is turned
2. AC Inlet off, the voltage will be discharged in about 30 seconds. B
3. Power Switch
4. Fuse (In the POWER SUPPLY Unit) 50F X DRIVE Assy .......................................................... (205 V)
5. STB Transformer and Converter Transformer 50F Y DRIVE Assy ......................................... (−280 V to 420 V)
(In the POWER SUPPLY Unit) 50F SCAN A Assy .......................................... (−280 V to 420 V)
6. Other primary side of the POWER SUPPLY Unit 50F SCAN B Assy ........................................... (−280 V to 420 V)
: Part is Charged Section.

: Part is the High Voltage Generating Points
other than the Charged Section.
Plate Y 50F Y DRIVE Assy POWER SUPPLY Unit 50F X DRIVE Assy Plate X
D
50F SCAN A Assy
E
50F SCAN B Assy
F
AC inlet Power switch
Fig. High Voltage Generating Point (Rear view)

PDP-5020FD 7
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 ACCESSORIES
A
Remote control Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet)

(AXD1561) (ADG1215)
Alkaline dry cell battery (LR6, AA) (2) Binder Assy (AEC2158)
Cable clamps (4)
C Fall Prevention Steel Assy

(AXY1218) Cleaning cloth (AED1285)
Screws to Metal Fittings (2) Falling Prevention

(M4×35 mm) Metal Fittings (2)
Warranty card Operating instructions (ARE1488)
8 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Speaker accessories
Speaker cables (2) Speaker
(SDS1202)
Speaker Brackets (Side) (2) Speaker Mounting Screws (9) Speaker Bracket (Center)
(SXG1158) (M5 × 10 mm) (SXG1159)
(SBA1292)
PDP-5020FD 9
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
10 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
PDP-5020FD 11
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
2.3 PANEL FACILITIES
A
Front Section
12 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Rear Section
PDP-5020FD 13
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
Remote Control Unit
14 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
PDP-5020FD 15
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
3. BASIC ITEMS FOR SERVICE

3.1 CHECK POINTS AFTER SERVICING
A
Items to be checked after repair (PDP)
To ensure the quality of the product after repair, check the recommended items shown below:
No. Procedures Item to be checked

Check if all the symptoms pointed out by the customer have been
1 The symptoms in question must not be reproduced.
addressed.
Connect all external peripheral equipment as originally connected
2 Connect the peripheral equipment.
and check if the connections are correct.
Tune in to the stations that the customer would normally receive
3 Check the video and audio.
and check if video and audio are normal.
B Use the buttons and controls on the remote control unit and main
4 Check the buttons and controls.
unit and check if they operate properly.
Check for any scratches or dirt that have been made or attached
5 Check the cabinet.
on the cabinet after receiving the product for repair.
See the table below for the items to be checked regarding video and audio:
Item to be checked regarding video Item to be checked regarding audio
Block noise Distortion
Horizontal noise Noise
C
Dot noise Volume too low
Disturbed image (video jumpiness) Volume too high
Too dark Volume fluctuating
Too bright Sound interrupted
Mottled color
D Cleaning
Name Part No. Remarks
Cleaning paper GED-008 Used to fan cleaning.

Refer to “9.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)”.
16 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
3.2 QUICK REFERENCE
Quick Reference upon Service Visit 1

A
Notes, PD/SD diagnosis, and methods for various settings
Notes when visiting for service PD/SD Subcategory confirmation procedure

1. Notes when disassembling/reassembling If the DISPLAY key is pressed during
No. of LEDs shutdown, the orange LED flashes.
1 Rear case For indication patterns other than
Item flashing
When reassembling the rear case, the screws must be tightened in a described below, see 5.4 [2].
specific order. Be careful not to tighten them in the wrong order forcibly. Red Blue
For details, see "Rear Case" in "7. DISASSEMBLY". SD SD Subcategory
SQ_LSI Blue 1
2 Attaching screws for the HDMI connector 1 EEPROM
Module device communication Blue 2
2 2 BACKUP
When attaching the HDMI connector after replacing the Main Assy, DIGITAL-RST2 Blue 3
secure the HDMI connector manually with a screwdriver, but not 3 DAC
Panel temperature Blue 4 1 PANEL high temperature
with an electric screwdriver. If you tighten the screws too tightly 4
with an electric screwdriver, the screw heads may be damaged, in Audio Blue 5 2 PANEL low temperature
which case the screws cannot be untightened/tightened any more. Module UCOM communication Blue 6 1 Tuner 1
B
2 MSP/MAP
Main 3-wire serial communication Blue 7
3 AV Switch
2. On parts replacement Main IIC communication Blue 8 4 RGB Switch
1 How to discharge before replacing the Assys Main UCOM communication Blue 9 8 5 Main VDEC
A charge of significant voltage remains in the Plasma Panel even 6 VDEC-SDRAM
FAN Blue 10
after the power is turned off. Safely discharge the panel before 7 AD/PLL
replacement of parts, in either manner indicated below: Unit high temperature Blue 11
8 HDMI
A: Let the panel sit at least for 3 minutes after the power is turned off. D-TUNER communication Blue 12
11 US-MSP
B: Turn the Large Signal System off before the power is turned off MTB-RST2/RST4 Blue 13 1 RST2
then, after 1 minute, turn the power off. 13
Main EEPROM Blue 15 2 RST4
For details, see "5.6 [1] PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON/OFF
FUNCTION". LED Display Information
2 On the settings after replacement of the Assys MR POWER Red 1
For indication patterns other than
Some boards need settings made after replacement of the Assys. POWER Red 2
described below, see 5.1 [1].
For details, see "8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT". SCAN Red 3
SCN-5V Red 4 1 Rewriting software
3. On various settings C
Y-DCDC Red 6 B
R
1 Setting in Factory mode Y-SUS Red 7
After a Mask indication into the panel is performed, be sure to 2 No backup
set the Mask setting to "OFF" then exit Factory mode. ADRS Red 8 B
R
X-DCDC Red 10
3 PD (2-15)
X-SUS Red 11 B
DIG-DCDC Red 12 R
UNKNOWN Red 15 4 SD (1-15)

B
R
How to locate several items on the Factory menu Adjustments and Settings after replacement of the
Assys (Procedures in Factory mode) D
{ } : Item on the Factory menu
[ ] : Key on the remote control unit 1. Digital Video Assy: Transfer of backup data
" " : Screen indication 1 Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {BACKUP DATA}. (After entering Factory
mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], press [j] seven times, then
press [ENTER/SET].)
1. Confirmation of accumulated power-on time and power-on 2 Select {TRANSFER}, using [l], then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5
count seconds.
Select {INFORMATION} then {HOUR METER}. 3 After transfer of backup data is completed, {ETC} is automatically selected, and the
(After entering Factory mode, press [j] four times.) LED on the front panel returns to normal lighting.
2. Confirmation of the Power-down and Shutdown histories 2. MAIN Assy: Execution of FINAL SETUP.
1 Select {INITIALIZE} then {FINAL SETUP}, then press [ENTER/SET]. (After entering
1 Panel system Factory mode, press [MUTING] three times, then press [j] four times.)
PD: Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {POWER DOWN}. 2 Select "YES", using [l]. Then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds.
(After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press 3 After "FINAL SETUP IS COMPLETE" is displayed on the screen, turn the POWER
[ENTER/SET], then press [j] two times.) switch of the main unit off.
SD: Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {SHUT DOWN}.
(After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press 3. POWER SUPPLY Unit: Clearance of the accumulated power-on count E
[ENTER/SET], then press [j] three times.) and maximum temperature value
1 Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {P COUNT INFO}. (After entering Factory
2 MTB section mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], press [j] seven times, press
Select {INFORMATION} then {MAIN NG}. [ENTER/SET], then press [j] six times.)
(After entering Factory mode, press [j] two times.) 2 Press [l] to select "CLEAR". Hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds.
After clearance is completed, "ETC" is automatically selected. Clear the maximum
3. How to display the Mask indication temperature value (MAX TEMP) in the same manner.
1 Mask indication in the panel side
4. Other Assys: Clearance of the maximum temperature value
1. Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {RASTER MASK SETUP}. 1 Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {MAX TEMP}. (After entering Factory mode,
(After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER], press [j] seven times, press [ENTER/SET],
[ENTER/SET], then press [j] 8 times.) then press [j] seven times.)
2. Press [ENTER/SET], then select a Mask indication, using [i] or [j]. 2 Press [l] to select "CLEAR". Hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds.
After clearance is completed, "ETC" is automatically selected.
PDP-5020FD 17
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Quick Reference upon Service Visit 2

A
Mode transition and structure of layers in Service Factory mode
Mode transition in Service Factory mode Structure of Layers in Service Factory Mode
Up
• To shift to another mode, press [MUTING].
INFORMATION mode
• To shift to another item in a specific mode,
1. VERSION (1) The software versions for each microcomputer
press [i] or [j]. 2. VERSION (2) The Flash memory versions for each device
• To shift to the next nested layer below for an 3. MAIN NG The shutdown message ID/event times
item with a "(+)" indication, press [ENTER/SET]. (Going Clear mode by [ENTER/SET] key)
To return to the next nested layer above, 3-1. CLEAR Select Yes by [l] key l pushing and hold [ENTER/SET] key
Down also press [ENTER/SET]. 4. TEMPERATURE The temperature/FAN rotating status/Room Light Sensor
5. HOUR METER The HOUR METER/P-COUNT information
INFORMATION mode INITIALIZE mode 5-1. CLEAR Select Yes by [l] key l pushing and hold [ENTER/SET] key
1. VERSION (1) 1. SIDE MASK LEVEL 6. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 The information of HDMI information files
2. VERSION (2) 2. FINAL SETUP 7. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 The information of HDMI information files
B 3. MAIN NG 3. DTB SERVICE MENU 8. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 The signal information of VDEC
4. TEMPERATURE 4. Wide XGA AUTO 9. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 The signal information of VDEC
5. HOUR METER 5. AUTO ADJUSTMENT
6. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 PANEL FACTORY mode Refer to [PANEL FACTORY MODE]
7. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2
8. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1
OPTION mode
9. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2
1. CH PRESET For production line use
2. ANTENNA MODE For production line use
3. AFT For production line use
4. SYNC DET For technical analysis
5. CTI For technical analysis
6. CC For technical analysis
PANEL FACTORY mode OPTION mode INITIALIZE mode

1. PANEL INFORMATION 1. CH PRESET 1. SIDE MASK LEVEL For factory use
2. PANEL WORKS 2. ANTENNA MODE 1-1. SIDE MASK LEVEL
3. POWER DOWN 3. AFT 2. FINAL SETUP Set to Factory default settings (it should perform after
C 4. SHUT DOWN 4. SYNC DET 2-1. DATA RESET replacing a MAIN Assy)
5. PANEL-1 ADJ 5. CTI 3. DTB SERVICE MODE Information for the Digital Tuner Service Menu is displayed
6. PANEL-2 ADJ 6. CC 3-1. MODE SHIFT
7. PANEL FUNCTION 4. Wide XGA AUTO For technical analysis
8. ETC. 5. AUTO ADJUSTMENT
9. RASTER MASK SETUP
10. PATTEN MASK SETUP
11. COMBI MASK SETUP
Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 1 Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 2
1. PANEL INFORMATION Version indication of the panel 8. ETC (+)
For transferring backup data (after replacement of
2. PANEL WORKS Indications of the accumulated power-on time and 1. BACKUP DATA
the DIGITAL Assy)
power-on count of the panel 2. DIGITAL EEPROM
Change the adjustment status of the DIGITAL Assy.
3. POWER DOWN Indication of the Power-down history 3. PD INFO.
D 4. SHUT DOWN Indication of the Shutdown history 4. SD INFO. For clearance of data for the corresponding items.
5. PANEL-1 ADJ (+) 5. HR-MTR INFO. The clearing method is the same: Select "CLEAR",
1. VOL SUS 6. PM/B1-B5 then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5
2. VOL OFFSET 7. P COUNT INFO. seconds.
Settings required after replacement of the panel
• • • • • 8. MAX TEMP.
9. MIRROR Switch the Mirror display mode.
10. RESET1ST_KSB 10. CLS Switch the function when checking the color sensor
• • • • • level.
Items for factory use
9. RASTER MASK SETUP (+)
25. SUS FREQ For AM noise prevention (Depending on the mode, 1. MASK OFF For use while the Raster Mask is displayed.
brightness of the screen changes.) 2. RST MASK 01 Use [i] or [j] to select the type of mask.
For confirmation of the result of the setting change, • • • • • Use [l] or [k] to select the sequence.
6. PANEL-2 ADJ (+) the unit must be turned off then back on again.
1. R-HIGH 10. PATTERN MASK SETUP (+)
2. G-HIGH For the WB adjustment of the panel and ABL 1. MASK OFF For use while the Pattern Mask is displayed.
• • • • • adjustment. 2. PTN MASK 01 Use [i] or [j] to select the type of mask.
E 6. B-LOW A setting table is available for each signal frequency. • • • • • Use [l] or [k] to select the sequence.
7. ABL
11. COMBI MASK SETUP (+)
7. PANEL FUNCTION (+) 1. MASK OFF For use while the Combination Mask is displayed.
1. R-LEVEL 2. CMB MASK 01 Use [i] or [j] to select the type of mask.
• • • • • Items for factory use Use [l] or [k] to select the sequence.
• • • • •
To "Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 2"
18 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
3.3 PCB LOCATIONS
A
Note: The wiring shown in the photo is different from the actual wiring, because the product in the photo is a prototype.
Upon servicing, be sure to restore the original wiring of the unit after repair work.
50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS S

Assy Assy Assy Assy
50F SCAN A Assy
B
POWER SUPPLY
Unit FAN CONNECT Assy
SENSOR Assy
50F Y DRIVE 50F X DRIVE
Assy Assy
SIDE IO SIDE HDMI
MAIN 50F DIGITAL
50F SCAN B Assy
Assy Assy
Assy Assy
C
SIDE KEY Assy
POWER SW Assy
50F ADDRESS S 50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS L

Assy Assy Assy Assy
PC Assy IO_AUDIO Assy
IR Assy
RLS Assy LED Assy D

Front view Rear view Front view
NOTES: - Parts marked by “NSP” are generally unavailable because they are not in our Master Spare Parts List.
- The > mark found on some component parts indicates the importance of the safety factor of the part.
Therefore, when replacing, be sure to use parts of identical designation.
Mark No. Description Part No. Mark No. Description Part No.
LIST OF ASSEMBLIES
NSP 50F ADDRESS L ASSY AWW1348 MAIN ASSY AWW1371
NSP 50F ADDRESS S ASSY AWW1349 SIDE HDMI ASSY AWW1372 E
NSP 50F SCAN A ASSY AWW1350 IO_AUDIO ASSY AWW1352

IC2801 - IC2808 AN16184A SIDE IO ASSY AWW1356
PC ASSY AWW1359
NSP 50F SCAN B ASSY AWW1351 SIDE KEY ASSY AWW1361
IC2901 - IC2908 AN16184A LED ASSY AWW1362
SENSOR ASSY AWW1340 IR ASSY AWW1363

50F DIGITAL Assy AWW1347 FAN CONNECT ASSY AWW1364
RLS ASSY AWW1365
50F X DRIVE ASSY AWV2546 POWER SW ASSY AWW1366
50F Y DRIVE ASSY AWV2547
> POWER SUPPLY UNIT AXY1200 F
PDP SERVICE ASSY 509F AWU1339
PDP-5020FD 19
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
3.4 JIGS LIST
Name Jig No. Remarks

Service Cotton Cloth Glove GYX1002 7.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM
20 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
PDP-5020FD 21
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4. BLOCK DIAGRAM
4.1 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)
A
22 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
k When ordering service parts, be sure to refer to “EXPLODED VIEWS and PARTS LIST” or
“PCB PARTS LIST”.
k The > mark found on some component parts indicates the importance of the safety factor
of the part. Therefore, when replacing, be sure to use parts of identical designation. F
OVERALL DIAGRAM
PDP-5020FD
PDP-5020FD 23
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4.2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)
F0015
FERRITE CORE
ATX1069
F0016
FERRITE CORE
ATX1069
24 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
OVERALL DIAGRAM
PDP-5020FD
PDP-5020FD 25
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4.3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
NOTE: +17V
SECONDARY PRIMARY
+6.5V
WIRE HARNESS
P2
VADR
T702
FFC VSUS
SCAN A ASSY
(HIGH-SIDE)
VSUS
VH IC5V
SCAN SIGNAL +17V
P1
SCAN IC
IC2801 +6.5V
+5V T901
VH IC5V PSUS Y DRIVE ASSY VADR +17V VSUS
VADR
SCAN IC +17V
VSUS REG
IC2802 +6.5V
VH IC5V Y6
RST-D SUS Y2
SCAN IC BLOCK BLOCK
VC_S +6.5V
IC2803 +17V VKNOFS4 VADR
VH IC5V VC_P VYPRST +12V
P6
SCAN IC STB5.1V
KNOFS4 IC202
IC2804 PRST SOFT-G
VH IC5V PSUS BLOCK BLOCK
SCAN IC VC_U +17V VSNOFS

IC2805 +17V VKNOFS2
B VH IC5V
RESONANCE
VC_S
P5
BLOCK +17V +17V T501
SCAN IC MSK-S SNOFS
IC2806 VH KNOFS2
VH
SA1
VH IC5V IC5V BLOCK Drive

Y3
VC_S VC_S
IC5V Signal
Gate Signal
SCAN IC
+12V +12V
SUSOUT
IC2807
VH IC5V
P9
+6.5V +6.5V
H-MSK
SCAN IC
L-MSK
VSUS +17V
IC2808 +5V
VH IC5V SUS SUS Drive Signal

SCAN SIGNAL BLOCK PreDrive M_SW_DET
SCAN IC
IC2901 +17V
VH VH Drive Signal
P7
VH IC5V PSUS LOGIC
T101
SB1
IC5V BLOCK STB3.4V

Y4
SCAN IC IC5V VYPRST Q202

IC2902 VC_U +17V VSNOFS VKNOFS1 AC_DET
VH IC5V VH Y1
SCAN IC VSUS MAIN
IC2903 RESONANCE DRF_SW_B
BLOCK DC/DC
M_SW_DET
VH IC5V CONV.
EXT_PD
SCAN IC PSUS VSUS_ADJ
VKNOFS1
P4
IC2904 VKNOFS2 VKNOFS4 PS_PD
+17V VKNOFS3
VH IC5V VKNOFS3 RELAY
DRF_B
SCAN IC +17V VC_S VC_U +17V IC5V VC_P
KNOFS1 VSUS AC_DET
IC2905
VH IC5V KNOFS3 PD_TRIG_B
BLOCK 15V IC5V/VF
SCAN IC SUS DC/DC DC/DC Y5
IC2906 IC5V BLOCK CONV. CONV.
C VH IC5V
Photo Coupler Scan Signal VADR
SCAN IC
IC2907 BLOCK
VH IC5V
SCAN IC
IC2908
SCAN B ASSY SENSOR
TE1
(LOW-SIDE) ASSY
D24 D25
V+3V_EEP
SCL,SDA
V+6_5V V+
TEMP1
V+12V V+10V
10V
REG. RELAY1
V+2_5V_D V+1_2V_D V+3_3V_D

1.2V
REG. DC-DC
V+2_5V_D
DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC V+2_5V_D V+1_8V_D CONVERTER
Vsus_AD
IC1651 IC1661 IC1671 IC1681 IC1651 IC1661 IC1671 IC1681 BD8606FV
1.8V V+1_1V_D IC3801
REG.
PSW2
D D21
Y*****_PD
SCN**_PD
CLK / LE / HBLK CLK / LE / HBLK VOFS_ADJ,YPRST_ADJ, DAC DAC_**

LBLK/R/G/B LBLK/R/G/B SCAN,YSUS XKOFS*_ADJ
ADR_PD
SUS_MUTE
VADR1 VDDLS1 VADR2 VDDLS2 VADR3 VDDLS3 VADR4 VDDLS4 VADR1 VDDLS1 VADR2 VDDLS2 VADR3 VDDLS3 VADR4 VDDLS4 _MSK
OR
MASK PULSE
ADRS_P
RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE
BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK
V+3_3V_D ADR_PD1 V+3VACTV
V+10V
OR
D16
V+10V
V+10V
IC1601 IC1601 MODULE

V+3.3V
V+3.3V
V+75V
V+75V
LVDS LVDS
RECEIVER RECEIVER
AN/P BN/P AN/P BN/P M30620
V+3_3V_D Pulse SQ_NON
CN/P DN/P CN/P DN/P V+10V
CLKN/P ADDRESS L CLKN/P ADDRESS L Width
WE_SQ
AD2 AD1 ASSY AD2 AD1 ASSY
D15
CN1601 CN1602 CN1601 CN1602
V+3_3V_D
V+10V V+1_2
E V+2_5
D14
V+3_3
V+3_3V_D
V+10V
TRAN
AD1 AD2 AD1 AD2 PEG
D13
CN1802 CN1801 ADDRESS ADDRESS L CN1602 CN1601 I

AN/P BN/P
CN/P DN/P S ASSY ASSY AN/ P BN/ P
CN/ P DN/ P LVDS
CLKN/P
CLKN/ P
V+3.3V
V+75V
V+75V
V+3.3V
V+10V
V+1_1V_D
V+10V
IC1801 IC1601 V+1_8V_D

STOP_SQ
LVDS LVDS V+2_5V_D

RECEIVER RECEIVER V+3_3V_D
YSUS
SUB-
UART XY DRV
UART(CS
RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE SW PATT
D26
BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK DET_CS PE
VDDLS3 VADR3 VDDLS2 VADR2 VDDLS1 VADR1 VDDLS4 VADR4 VDDLS3 VADR3 VDDLS2 VADR2 VDDLS1 VADR1
CLK / LE / HBLK CLK / LE / HBLK

ODI_R, G, B
LBLK/R/G/B LBLK/R/G/B
MULTI_OE
SQ_SEL
UART
F
RELAY2
D12
DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC

IC1871 IC1861 IC1851 IC1681 IC1671 IC1661 IC1651
26 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
VSUS
X4 X DRIVE ASSY
PRIMARY
POWER SUPPLY UNIT VADR
SUS
BLOCK
Switching
+5V VSUS
+17V
Q703
VSUS VADR
REG
Switching XPRST
+6.5V VSUS
Q704 X2
Gate Signal
Switching +5V PSUS
+17V SUS
Q901 PFC Q103
01 BLOCK
Q104 D101
Q106 X1
Drive Signal SUS Gate Signal
+395V
Q902 PreDrive
Gate Signal
VPU +17V SOFT-D
LOGIC
BLOCK Drive Signal
RESONANCE PSUS
BLOCK +17V
D115
Drive Signal
OFFSET
BLOCK PSUS
VPOFS
Switching
VPOFS VPU
VXKOFS1
B
01 Q502 VXKOFS2
OFFSET
15V Reg.
+17V DC/DC VSUS
CONV.
Q503 X3
VADR SUS
BLOCK
AC
T101
INLET
IC101
D112
D108 NEUTRAL
LIVE POWER SW ASSY

+B FOR
RELAY F102 P3
DRIVE RY102
SW2
P10
D25 D23
RELAY
PS_PD
PD_TRG_B,
AC_DET, M_SW_DET
6_5V V+12V
DRF_SW_B
DRF_B
OR
RELAY1
DRF_B
D
KDD
AND DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC
AND
DRIVER IC
DC-DC IC1651 IC1661 IC1671 IC1681 IC1851 IC1861 IC1871
CONVERTER PSW1
BD8606FV V+6_5
D IC3801
PSW2
D
PD EXT_PD PSW21 LBLK/R/G/B LBLK/R/G/B
D22
X****_PD
VADR1 VDDLS1 VADR2 VDDLS2 VADR3 VDDLS3 VADR4 VDDLS4 VADR1 VDDLS1 VADR2 VDDLS2 VADR3 VDDLS3
PSIZE
SUS_MUT
AND
RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE

OR
E BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK

ADRS_P
PD_MUTE
TV V+3VACTV
IC1801
V+10V
V+10V
IC1601
V+3.3V
V+3.3V
V+75V
V+75V
AND LVDS LVDS

RESET
RECEIVER RECEIVER
MODULE UCOM
RESETX
V+3V_D AN/P BN/P

AN/P BN/P
RESET CN/P DN/P
V+3_3V_D CN/P DN/P
ADDRESS L ADDRESS S CLKN/P
AND
M30620FCSGP RST2 CLKN/P

V+10V
RST_SQ AD2 AD1 ASSY ASSY AD2 AD1
CN1601 CN1602 CN1801 CN1802
D20
V+3_3V_D
V+10V
V+1_2V_D
V+2_5V_D E
D19
V+3_3V_D
V+3_3V_D
LVDS LVDS V+10V
TRANSMITTER
AD1 AD2 AD1 AD2
PEG478A-K ADDRESS L CN1602 CN1601 ADDRESS L CN1602 CN1601
D18
IC3401
ASSY AN/ P BN/ P
CN/ P DN/ P
ASSY AN/ P BN/ P
CN/ P DN/ P
CLKN/ P CLKN/ P
V+3.3V
V+3.3V
V+3_3V_D
V+75V
V+75V
V+10V
V+10V
V+1_1V_D V+10V
V+3_3V_D IC1601 IC1601
V+1_8V_D LVDS LVDS
D17
V+2_5V_D Flash Memory RECEIVER RECEIVER

V+3_3V_D
SUS
SUB-FILD CONV. XSUS
&
T XY DRV SEQUENCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE
PATTERN GEN. BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK
GPIO8
PEG383B-K
IC3301 VDDLS4 VADR4 VDDLS3 VADR3 VDDLS2 VADR2 VDDLS1 VADR1 VDDLS4 VADR4 VDDLS3 VADR3 VDDLS2 VADR2 VDDLS1 VADR1
VDI

EVI_R, G, B
LBLK/R/G/B LBLK/R/G/B
EVI_SYNC
THEATE
DIGITAL
MULTI_OE
UART
F
RELAY2
V+3VACTV ASSY
D11
DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC

IC1681 IC1671 IC1661 IC1651 IC1681 IC1671 IC1661 IC1651
PDP-5020FD 27
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4.4 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
A USB LAN
Analog Audio signal

Analog Video signal M6
Component signal MAIN ASSY CN4107 JA6001
IC6201
Digital Video signal EDD5116AFTA
Digital Audio signal (512Mbit DDR)
Synchronized signal
Add0-12
Data signal DS_IF_P Data0-15 IC6202
Control signal DS_IF_N EDD5116AFTA
U5301 IC5501 (512Mbit DDR)
RF signal
AXF1178 MN884350
IC6203
EDD5116AFTA
IC6001 (512Mbit DDR)
BCM7404
IC6204
SIF OUT IC6001 EDD5116AFTA
(512Mbit DDR)
LA72702NVA
B AIR_L IC6403
AIR_R AGC1082
(S29GL25N90TFIRI)
SPDIF 256Mbit FLASH
I2S
AUDIO_OUT_L/R A_TUNER_V
JA7701
SW OUT Audio Out
SUBWOOFER
CVBS
L/R IN JA7701 Y/C
Input1
CVBS
L/R IN JA7701
Input2
EMMA_DA_GY
SIDE IO Assy IC8001

L/R IN JA8601 CVBS R2S11006FT Main Y/C
IC8201 Input3 (AVSW)
MAP5601M Sub Y/C
(MSP)
HP_L/R OUT CN8602
Head Phone
D
L/R IN JA7701
Input4 AUDIO IC4701
IC4702 HY57V641620FTP
CM0048BF 64Mbit (SDRAM)
L/R IN JA7701 (VDEC)
Input5 AUDIO
PC_L/R IN JA7802
Audio Input for PC GY_VDEC
OPT_OUT JA7881
SPDIF
Input2 Y/CB/CR (PB/PR)
EMMA_DA_GY/BCB/RCR
PC_RGB IC8101
CN8802
PC Input PC_H/V R2S11001FT
(RGBSW) IC4801
E AD9985KSTZ
PC Assy RGB/YPbPr (ADC) CLP
CLP
SPDIF
IC5001 CXB1444R
(HDMI SW)
IC8401
F TAS5122DCA JA8551
(D-AMP) SPEAKER TERMINAL
INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6
IO_AUDIO Assy HDMI HDMI HDMI
28 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
FAN FAN FAN FAN

A
SIDE KEY ASSY LED ASSY IR ASSY
KEY LED IR
Fan Connect FAN
KEY1
RESERVED KEY2 REM
FAN CONNECT ASSY
M5 M10
CN4202 CN4201 RLS ASSY
CN4209
RLS
M11
RLS
IC6811
CN4208
M15
AGC1072
(M30620FCSGP)
IF UCOM SR_OUT
TXD_SR
RXD_SR SR_OUT
B
TXD_232C
RXD_232C RS232C
IC7201
EDD5116AFTA
Add0-12 (512Mbit DDR)
Data0-15
IC7202
AGC1073
(S29GL032A90TFIR4)
IC7003 (32Mbit FLASH)
IO_AUDIO ASSY
uPD61123F1
(EMMA IISV)
IC7004
BR24L64F
(EEPROM)
DIN7 OSD 8bit *4
RGB 10bit *3
C
To
DIGITAL
ASSY
RGB 10bit *3
DIN1_DVO (12bit)
IC6702
EDD1232ABBH
128Mbit (DDR)
IC6703
EDD1232ABBH
DIN3_656DATA ( 10bit ) 128Mbit (DDR)
IC6501
DIN4_656DATA ( 8bit ) PD6568A IC6704
(ARIA) EDD1232ABBH D
128Mbit (DDR)
IC6701
AGC1078
(S29GL016A90TFIR2)
16Mbit Flash
DIN2(8Bit*3)
E
INT H/V, EXT H/V
IC4901
SIDE HDMI ASSY
DIN6 12bit *3
SII9125CTU
JA4901
JA7302
(HDMI RX) IC7302

M20
H2
CXB1443R
(HDMI SW)
F
INPUT7
HDMI
PDP-5020FD 29
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

P2 SECONDARY PRIMARY
VADR
Switching
+17V
T702
+6.5V Q703
VSUS
Switching
Q704 PFC Q103 D101

+395V Q104
B Switching Q106
P1 T901 Q901
VADR
+17V
+6.5V Q902
VSUS
P6 +12V
+6.5V
D115
STB5.1V
IC202
P5
+17V +17V
T501 Switching
C
Q502
P9 +12V +12V
+6.5V +6.5V Q503

Switching
P7
M_SW_DET
STB3.4V T101
Q202
+17V IC101
Switching
AC_DET D112
P4 D108
D
DRF_SW_B
M_SW_DET
EXT_PD
VSUS_ADJ
PS_PD
RELAY
DRF_B
AC_DET
PD_TRIG_B
NEUTRAL
LIVE
E
+B for
RELAY DRIVE F102
RY102 P3
P10
30 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
PDP-5020FD 31
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4.6 50F X DRIVE ASSY
50F X DRIVE ASSY VSUS

X4
VADR
SUS
BLOCK
B VSUS
+17V +5V
VSUS
REG VADR XPRST
+6.5V VSUS
X2 Gate Signal
+17V SUS PSUS

BLOCK
+5V
C Gate Signal
SUS
Drive Signal
PreDrive Gate Signal
X1
VPU +17V SOFT- D
Drive Signal PSUS

LOGIC RESONANCE
BLOCK BLOCK +17V
Drive Signal OFFSET

D
BLOCK
PSUS
VPOFS
VPOFS VPU
VXKOFS1
OFFSET VXKOFS2
15V Reg.
+17V DC/DC
CONV. VSUS
X3
E
VADR SUS
BLOCK
32 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
4.7 50F Y DRIVE, 50F SCAN A and B ASSYS
50F SCAN A ASSY

(HIGH-SIDE)
VH IC5V
SCAN IC
SCAN SIGNAL
50F Y DRIVE ASSY
IC2801 +5V
VH IC5V PSUS
VADR +17V VSUS
SCAN IC +17V
VSUS REG
B
IC2802 +6.5V
VH IC5V Y6
RST-D SUS Y2
SCAN IC BLOCK BLOCK
VC_S
IC2803 +17V VKNOFS4 VADR
VH IC5V VC_P VYPRST
SCAN IC KNOFS4
IC2804 PRST SOFT-G
VH IC5V PSUS BLOCK BLOCK
SCAN IC VC_U +17V VSNOFS

IC2805 +17V VKNOFS2
VH IC5V VC_S
RESONANCE
BLOCK
SCAN IC MSK-S SNOFS
IC2806 VH KNOFS2
VH
SA1
VH IC5V IC5V BLOCK Drive

Y3
VC_S VC_S
IC5V Signal C
Gate Signal
SCAN IC
SUSOUT
IC2807
VH IC5V
H-MSK
SCAN IC
L-MSK
VSUS +17V
IC2808 +5V
VH IC5V SUS SUS Drive Signal

BLOCK PreDrive
SCAN SIGNAL
SCAN IC
IC2901 VH
PSUS VH Drive Signal
LOGIC
VH IC5V
SB1
IC5V BLOCK
Y4
SCAN IC IC5V VYPRST

IC2902 VC_U +17V VSNOFS VKNOFS1
VH IC5V VH Y1
SCAN IC VSUS MAIN
IC2903 RESONANCE
BLOCK DC/DC D
VH IC5V CONV.
SCAN IC PSUS
IC2904 VKNOFS1
+17V VKNOFS2 VKNOFS4
VKNOFS3
VH IC5V VKNOFS3
SCAN IC +17V VC_S VC_U +17V IC5V VC_P

IC2905 KNOFS1 VSUS
VH IC5V KNOFS3
BLOCK 15V IC5V/VF
SCAN IC SUS DC/DC DC/DC Y5
IC2906 IC5V BLOCK CONV. CONV.
VH IC5V
Photo Coupler Scan Signal VADR
SCAN IC
IC2907 BLOCK
VH IC5V
SCAN IC
IC2908 E
50F SCAN B ASSY

(LOW-SIDE)
PDP-5020FD 33
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4.8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of 50F X, Y DRIVE and 50F SCAN A and B ASSYS
A
50F Y DRIVE ASSY to ADDRESS ASSY 50F X DRIVE ASSY to ADDRESS ASSY
5.0V 5.0V
Logic Logic
from POWER from POWER
SUPPLY SUPPLY
UNT
SUS-B
Pre Vadr UNT SUS-B
Pre Vadr
drive drive
IGBT IGBT
5.0V 5V 6.5V 5.0V 5V 6.5V
Reg.IC Reg.IC
SUS-G
Pre 17V SUS-G
Pre 17V
drive drive
IGBT IGBT
VSUS VSUS
Pre VC_U 15V Pre VPU DC/DC

SUS-U drive SUS-U drive
IGBT VC_S DC/DC IGBT Conv.
Conv.
B
VPOFS
Pre Pre
SUS-D drive SUS-D drive
IGBT VC_P IC5V IGBT
IC5V DC/DC
Conv.
Pre
HMSK drive XPRST
FET FET
VH DC/DC
Pre
LMSK drive Conv. XSOFT-D
FET FET
Pre Pre
YPRST drive XKOFS1
drive
FET VYPRST FET VKOFS1 XKOFS1
Reg. Reg.
Pre Pre
SNOFS drive XKOFS2
drive
C FET VSNOFS FET VKOFS2 XKOFS2
Reg. Reg.
YKOFS Pre VYKOFS

1 drive 12
FET Reg.
YKOFS Pre Note:

2 drive
FET VYPRST, VSNOFS, VYKOFS12, VYKOFS3, VYKOFS4
VXKOFS1 and VXKOFS2 voltages are electrical volume controls.
YKOFS Pre VYKOFS
3 drive 3
FET Reg.
YKOFS Pre VYKOFS

4 drive 4
FET Reg.
D Pre
RST-D drive
FET
Pre
SOFT-G
drive
FET
Scan
Logic
IC5V VH
Scan IC
E 50F SCAN A, B ASSYS
34 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
4.9 50F ADDRESS L and S ASSYS
A
50F ADDRESS L ASSY
DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC
IC1651 IC1661 IC1671 IC1681
CLK / LE / HBLK
LBLK/R/G/B
B
VADR1 VDDLS1 VADR2 VDDLS2 VADR3 VDDLS3 VADR4 VDDLS4
RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE

BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK
V+10V
IC1601
V+3.3V
V+75V
LVDS
RECEIVER
C
AN/P BN/P
CN/P DN/P
CLKN/P
AD2 AD1
CN1601 CN1602
50F ADDRESS S ASSY

DRIVER IC DRIVER IC DRIVER IC
IC1851 IC1861 IC1871
D
CLK / LE / HBLK
LBLK/R/G/B
VADR1 VDDLS1 VADR2 VDDLS2 VADR3 VDDLS3
RESONANCE RESONANCE RESONANCE

BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK E
IC1801
V+10V
V+3.3V
V+75V
LVDS
RECEIVER
AN/P BN/P
CN/P DN/P
CLKN/P
AD2 AD1
CN1801 CN1802 F
PDP-5020FD 35
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4.10 50F DIGITAL ASSY
50F DIGITAL ASSY

A
D24 D23
D25
V+12V V+10V V+6_5V V+12V
RELAY
DRF_SW_B
M_SW_DE
PD_TRG_B,
V+3V_EEP
PS_PD
10V
AC_DET,
TEMP1
SCL,SDA
REG
RELAY1 OR
RELAY1
V+2_5V_D V+1_2V_D
DRF_B
DRF_
V+3_3V_D
1.2V
REG KDD
AND
PSW1
AND
V+2_5V_D DC-DC
V+2_5V_D V+1_8V_D
CONVERTER
1.8V BD8606FV V+6_5V
REG Vsus_AD V+1_1V_D IC3801
PSW2
B
PSW2
Y*****_PD
SCN**_PD X****_PD
VOFS_ADJ,YPRST_ADJ, PD
D22
D21
YKNOFS**_ADJ DAC_**
DAC EXT_PD
SCAN,YSUS XKOFS*_ADJ
PSIZE
SUS_MUTE
O
AND
SUS_MUTE
R
ADR_PD_MSK Pulse
MASK Width
ADRS_PD
ADR_PD1
PD_MUTE
V+3_3V_D
V+10V V+3VACT
V+3VACT AND
C
D16
RESET
OR V+3V_D
RESETX
V+3_3V_D RESET V+3_3V_D
MODULE UCOM V+10V
V+10V
M30620FCSGP RST2 AND
IC3601 RST_SQ
Pulse SQ_NON
D15
D20
Width
WE_SQ
V+3_3V_D V+3_3V_D
V+10V V+10V
D14
D V+3_3V_D
D19
V+1_2V_D
V+2_5V_D
V+3_3V_D LVDS V+3_3V_D

V+10V V+10V
LVDS LVDS
TRANSMITTER
D18
D13
PEG478A-K
IC3401
V+3_3V_D
V+10V
V+1_1V_D V+3_3V_D
V+1_8V_D
V+2_5V_D
STOP_SQ
Flash Memory
D17
V+3_3V_D
IC3302
E YSUS
SUB-FILD CONV. GPIO8
&
XY DRV SEQUENCE
UART PATTERN GEN.
PEG383B-K XSUS
UART(CS)
IC3301
D26
DET_CS
VDI
EVI_R, G, B
THEATER
EVI_SYNC
ODI_R, G, B
MULTI_OE
SQ_SEL
RELAY2
UART
V+3VACTV
D12 D11
36 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
4.11 MAIN ASSY (DTV BLOCK DIAGRAM)
From EMMA2
MODE_SEL RF in
IF SW
ANALOG AGC A_TUNER_V

AGC&IF SW Tuner
[IC5303] RF AGC AXF1178
AIR_L To AV SW
[U5301] US BTSC DECODER
IF OUT SIF AIR R
LA72702NVA-A-E-TBB
[IC5301]
B
DS_IF_P
DS_IF_N SCL_AV
I2C SW SDA_AV
FLASH [IC5304]
256M From EMMA2
[IC6403] DIGITAL_AGC_CONTROL
IF_AGC
I2C_SEL
EBI BUS I2C_TUNER_SCL

I2C_TUNER_SDA
7404_I2C1_SCL
7404_I2C1_SDA
Demodulate IC
MN884350-K
TS0 [IC5501]
SDRAM
[IC6201] .
512Mbit DVO
[12bit]
C
1Chip System IC
SDRAM To ARIA
BCM7404XKPB11G-K
[IC6202] [IC6001]
MEMORY BUS
512Mbit
SDRAM
[IC6203] .
512Mbit
RXD_DT/TXD_DT
From/To EMMA2
SDRAM
[IC6204]
.
512Mbit
SPDIF
From USB From LAN To MAP

I2S D
Connector Connector
[CN4107] [JA6001]
PDP-5020FD 37
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4.12 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of MAIN ASSY
SW REG CONTROLED BY RELAY

17V±5% 12V±10% 6.5V-7%, +10%
V+17V V+12V V+6_5V

FAN_VCC1 V+5V_ANT
IC4302 IC4305
Variable-REG 11V-7V V+FAN_VCC1 5V-REG 5V±2% V+5V_ANT
(FAN_VCC1) (V+5V_ANT) TUNER
PQ200WNA1ZPH NJM2846DL3_05
FAN_CONT2 V+2_6V_D
IC4303 FAN_VCC2
Variable-REG 11V-7V V+FAN_VCC2
B
(FAN_VCC2)
PQ200WNA1ZPH
FAN_CONT2
IC4402 V+2_6V_D V+2_6V_D2

Q4412
2.6V±1.5% FET-SW 2.6V, +1.5%, -2% V+2_6V_D2_ARIA
V+1_2V_D (V+2_6V_D2)
RSS100N03
DD converter
PSW1_1
V+2_6V_D2_ARIA_DDR
V+2_6V_D_BCM
V+2_6V_D_BCM_DDR
BD8606
V+2_6V_D2_ARIA_ROM
C
V+1_2V_D V+1_2V_D2
Q4415 V+1_2V_D2_ARIA
1.2V±1.5% FET-SW 1.2V±2%
V+6_5V 0mA (Min)
(V+1_2V_D2)
1270mA (Typ)
RSS100N03
1524mA (Max)
PSW1_1
V+1_2V_D_BCM
V+1_2V_D_FE
D
V+5_1V_D V+5_1V_D_USB
5_1V±1.5% IC4301 5.1V±2%
V+2_6V_D V+5_1V_D_USB
OCP-SW
(V+5_1V_D_USB)
R5523N001B
0
0 USB_POW_E
0 V+3_3V_A
IC
IC4404
3V-REG
3.3V-REG
3.3V±1.5% V+3_3V_A_ADC
(V+3V_A)
(V+3_3V_A)
V+8V A NJM2846DL3_33
IC4304
8V±3% V+5V_D
V+5_1V_D
Variable-REG V+8V A
(V+8V_A)
PQ200WNA1ZPH V+3_3V_A2
Q4413
V+12V
3.3V+1.5%, -2%
FET-SW
(V+3_3V_A2_VDEC)
V+3_3V_A2_VDEC
RTQ040P02
PSW1_1
E
IC4308
V+31_5V_ANT
DD converter 30V±3% V+31_5V_ANT
(V+31_5V_ANT) TUNER
V+5_1V_D
F
I/O ASSY
38 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
STBY SW REG
STB3.4V±3.5% STB5.1V±5%
V+5_1V_STB
V+3_4V_STB
MAIN ASSY
V+3_4V_STB_IF V+3_4V_STB_LED SR, KEY
V+5_1V_STB_SR V+5_1V_STB_LED
Q4501
V+3_4V_ACT
3.4V±4% V+3_4V_ACT2
FET-SW Q4509 B
(V+3_4V_ACT) FET-SW 3.3V±5%
V+3_4V_ACT2_UCOM V+3_4V_ACT_MOD
RSS090P03 (V+3_4V_ACT2)
RTQ040P02
ACTIVE
V+1_5V_ACT
V+2_5V_ACT
IC4501 2.5V±1.5%
V+2_5V_ACT_UCOM
V+1_5V_ACT
DD converter
LTC3407
V+1_5V_ACT
1.5V±1.5% V+2_5V_ACT_UCOM_DDR
V+1_5V_ACT_UCOM
V+3_3V_ACT
Q4510 V+3_4V_D
FET-SW 3.4V±2% ADC
(V+3_4V_D)
RTQ040P02
V+2_6V_D
V+3_4V_D3
Q4506
FET-SW 3.4V±2%
V+3_4V_D3_VDEC V+3_4V_D3_VDEC_RAM
(V+3_4V_D3)
RSS090P03
PSW1_1
V+3_4V_D4
Q4522
FET-SW
3.4V±3%
V+3_4V_D4_HDMI
(V+3_3V_D4)
RSS100N03
D
PSW1_1
V+1_8V_D2
IC4504
V+3_4V_D3_ARIA 1.8V±1.5%
1.8V-REG V+1_8V_D2_HDMI
(V+1_8V_D2)
NJM2846DL3_18
PSW1_1
V+3_4V_D3_ARIA_ROM
Q4523
V+1_8V_D3
FET-SW 1.8V±2%
V+1_8V_D3_VDEC
V+3_4V_D2 (V+1_8V_D3)
QQ4507 RTQ045N03
FET-SW
3.4V±3%
FET-SW V+3_4V_D2_BCM V+3_3V_ANT_BCM
(V+3_3V_D5)
(V+3_4V_D2) PSW1_1
RTQ040P02
RTQ040P02
V+2_6V_D
V+3_4V_D2_FE
E
PDP-5020FD 39
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
4.13 IO_AUDIO ASSY
IO_AUDIO ASS'Y
+6.5V +17V +17V +12V
IO1 +3.4V IO2 CN7502
CN7501 +12V
REGULATOR
+1.8V IC7961
+3.4V NJM78M12DL1A
B
SIDE_L/R
PWM
+17V
MAP IC OPT_OUT OPTICAL
IC8201 OUT
DIGITAL AMP IC
MAP5601M OUTPUT(AUDIO) SUB WOOFER OUT
IC8401
TAS5122DCA AUDIO OUT
INPUT(AUDIO)
INPUT1
INPUT2
C INPUT4 (HDMI L/R)
INPUT5 (HDMI L/R)
LPF PC AUDIO
DC
DETECT
BLOCK
AC_AM_MUTE
R_OUT+
L_OUT+
R_OUT-
L_OUT-
D
TEMPERATURE
AC_HP_MUTE
AC_A_MUTE
AIR_L,AIR_R
R OUT L OUT
SDA_AV ,SCL_AV
SP TERMINAL RST_MSP
E
SPDIF_HDMI, SPDIF_DTV, I2S_BCLK_DTV, I2S_LRCLK_DTV, I2S_SDATA_DTV
OTW
A_NG_B
SR_OUT
SR_OUT
JA7871
40 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
+3.4V +1.8V +6.5V +5V +12V +8V
REGULATOR REGULATOR REGULATOR

IC7951 IC7901 IC7911
NJM2846DL3-18 NJM2846DL3-05 P0200WNA1ZPH
for SIDE ASSY

HP_L/R
B
CN7505 IO5
for PC ASSY
+5V
SIDE_V CN7506 IO6
SDA/SCL_AV5
AV SW EMMA_DA_GY
INPUT(CVBS) IC8001
R2S11006FT A_TUNER_V
C
RGB,VD,HD
INPUT(YCbCr) SDA/SCL_AV5
RGB SW EMMA_DA_GY/BCB/RCR
+5V IC8101
R2S11001FT CLP_RGB2
IO4
CN7504
for MAIN ASSY
TEMP2 D
RCR/BCB/GY_AD
MAIN_C/Y, SUB_C/Y
IO3
EXT_HD/VD, INT_HD/VD
SDA/SCL_AV5
HP_PLUG
WP_EDID E
DSUB_DET
TXD_232C_1
RXD_232C_1, 232C_DET
RS232C
JA7851
for MAIN ASSY
CN7503
PDP-5020FD 41
5 6 7 8
F
E
B
A
D
C
42
FAN FAN FAN FAN
1
1
L1 FA2 FA3 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

FAN CONNECT P5
LED ASSY ASSY
FA1 P8 P9
SW1
USB
SIDE KEY ASSY
4.14 LED and IR ASSYS
M11 M5 M3 M2
M6
2
2
DIGITAL ASSY
M15 M1 D12
RE1
IR ASSY
PC ASSY
M4 D11
RL1
RLS ASSY
PDP-5020FD
MAIN ASSY PC1
3
3
IO6
IO5
M12
IO3 SIDE IO
M20
ASSY
IO2
SIDE HDMI ASSY H1 IO4

M13 S1
M14 IO1
4
4
IO_AUDIO ASSY
5 6 7 8
5. DIAGNOSIS
5.1 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION
A
[1] LED DISPLAY INFORMATION
LED Pattern
Status LED LED Pattern/Remarks
AC OFF or Blue
Red
Main Power Switch OFF
Orange
Standby Power Blue
Management Red
Orange
Blue
Power On Red B
Orange
Blue Once Twice n times 2.5s Once
Power-Down Red 500ms *1
Orange
Blue 500ms *2
Shutdown Red Once Twice n times 2.5s Once
Orange
Shutdown Blue 500ms *2
Red Once Twice n times 2.5s Once
(Subcategory flashing)
Orange 500ms *3
No digital adjustment Blue 200ms
Red
data copied for backup
Orange
Blue 100ms C
Updating the PC Red 100ms
Orange
Blue
During factory operation Red
Orange
During DTB Blue 100ms
communication Red
inhibit Orange
Blue 100ms
During USB update Red 100ms
Orange
Updating of USB is Blue 100ms
Red 100ms
finished normally.
Orange
D
Updating of USB is Blue 100ms
abnormally finished. Red 100ms
Orange 500ms Once 500ms Twice 500ms n times 2.5sec 500ms *4
Blue
Sleep timer Red
Orange
*1: Notify upon the power-down content by Red LED flashing number of times. POWER ON STANDBY SLEEP
*2: Notify upon the shutdown content by Blue LED flashing number of times
*3: Notify upon the subcategory number by Orange LED flashing number of times.
*4: Notify upon the abnormal state by Orange LED flashing number of times.
PDP-5020FD 43
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2] POWER ON SEQUENCE
REM
infrared Side Keys MOD
receiver Power MOD
Microcomputer OR 4 RELAY Control
IC3601
B
Inv. Amp
Q8751
KEY_1 TXD_MD
REM KEY_2 RXD_MD RELAY2
REQ_MD
C
1 3
SR_IN
IF MAIN
Inv. Amp 1 Microcomputer 2
Q4211 Microcomputer
IC6811 IC7003
TXD_IF
RXD_IF
CE_IF
Inv. Amp REQ_IF
Q6812 BUSY_IF
SR_OUT
D
SR OUT Jack
JA7871
1 : The remote control (or KEY) signal is input to the IF microcomputer.

2 : The IF microcomputer sends the operation data of the remote control unit (or KEY) to the main microcomputer.
3 : The main microcomputer issues a startup command (PON) to the MOD microcomputer.
4 : The relay is controlled with logical OR interpretation of control signals by the main microcomputer and
module (MOD) microcomputer.
44 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[3] DETAILS OF POWER ON SEQUENCE
AC-OFF Main Power OFF, Passive Standby
ON OFF
V+3_4V_STB
Power supply V+5_1V_STB AC
Front LED: OFF LED STB
IR AC_DET Trans
KEY IF ucom SW
V+6_5V
232C M_SW_DET AC_DET
SW Main
CEC ACTIVE
M_SW_DET_B
RLS Switch
Microcomputer
RST3
output port setting AND EMG_DDC COLOR-S REG
DCDC/REG (*)
IF: ACTIVE OFF Main_ RST4 B
ucom M_SW_DET
Main: RELAY2 OFF EEPROM DCDC/REG PC RGB-SW
PSW1
Main: PSW1 OFF A.TUNER
A.D.TUNER FAN IO_AUDIO AV- SW
A.D.TUNER
Module: RELAY1•KDD OFF RST2
VDEC COFDEM
MPX
COFDEM
D.TUNER
DEMOD
CIF
Module: DRF_B OFF HDMI BCM AD TEMP2 D- AMP
ASIC BCM(HD)
BCM RELAY
MAP
MSP
Microcomputer Main ucom
input port state Digital RELAY2
RELAY1 OR RELAY
Main: RST4 OFF •KDD
Main: RST2 OFF
Module: RST2 PS_PD
OFF PS_PD/PD_TRG_B
EEPROM OR EXT_PD
EXT_PD V+17V
Module_
RST2 PD V+12V
ucom Vcc
(*): PRO-111FD only V+6_5V
DAC DCDC/REG Trans
ASIC
TEMP1 VSUS C
DRF_B Vs/Va
BACK_EEP AND VADR
Trans
Sensor PD PD
X/Y Drive, SCAN Address
ASIC ADDRESS
DRIVE DRIVE
DCDC/REG
SCAN SCAN
All devices are not electrified.
AC-ON Main Power OFF, Passive Standby
ON OFF
V+3_4V_STB D
IR AC_DET Trans
KEY IF ucom SW
V+6_5V
SW Main
CEC ACTIVE "kill me"
Microcomputer RLS
M_SW_DET_B Switch
output port setting RST3
AND EMG_DDC COLOR-S REG
IF: ACTIVE OFF DCDC/REG (*)
Main_ RST4
Main: RELAY2 OFF ucom
RGB-SW M_SW_DET
EEPROM DCDC/REG PC
Main: PSW1 OFF PSW1
A.TUNER
A.D.TUNER FAN AV- SW
Module: RELAY1•KDD OFF A.D.TUNER IO_AUDIO
RST2 COFDEM
MPX
VDEC COFDEM
Module: DRF_B OFF D.TUNER
DEMOD
CIF
HDMI BCM AD TEMP2 D - AMP
ASIC BCM(HD)
BCM RELAY
MSP
MAP
Microcomputer Main E
ucom
input port state Digital RELAY2
Main: RST4 RELAY1 OR
OFF RELAY
•KDD
Main: RST2 OFF
Module: RST2 OFF PS_PD
PS_PD/PD_TRG_B
EEPROM OR EXT_PD
EXT_PD V+17V
Module_
RST2 PD V+12V
ucom Vcc
V+6_5V
(*): PRO-111FD only DAC DCDC/REG Trans
ASIC
TEMP1 VSUS
DRF_B Vs/Va
BACK_EEP AND VADR
Trans
Sensor PD PD
ASIC ADDRESS
DRIVE DRIVE
DCDC/REG
SCAN SCAN
F
Only the periphery of the IF microcomputer are electrified.
The user operation is invalid due to Main Switch off.
PDP-5020FD 45
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
AC-ON Main Power OFF, Active Standby

ON OFF
V+3_4V_STB
IR AC_DET Trans
KEY IF ucom SW
V+6_5V
SW Main
CEC ACTIVE
M_SW_DET_B Switch
RLS
Microcomputer RST3
COLOR-S
AND EMG_DDC REG
output port setting DCDC/REG (*)
Main_ RST4
IF: ACTIVE ON ucom
RGB-SW M_SW_DET
EEPROM DCDC/REG PC
B Main: RELAY2 OFF PSW1
A.TUNER
Main: PSW1 OFF RST2 A.D.TUNER
VDEC COFDEM
MPX
Module: RELAY1•KDD OFF COFDEM
D.TUNER
HDMI DEMOD
CIF TEMP2
BCM AD D - AMP
Module: DRF_B OFF ASIC BCM(HD)
BCM RELAY
MSP
MAP
Main ucom
Microcomputer Digital RELAY2
input port state RELAY1 OR RELAY
•KDD
Main: RST4 OFF
Main: RST2 OFF PS_PD
PS_PD/PD_TRG_B
Module: RST2 OFF EEPROM OR EXT_PD
EXT_PD V+17V
Module_
RST2 PD V+12V
ucom Vcc
V+6_5V
DAC DCDC/REG Trans
ASIC
(*): PRO-111FD only TEMP1
DRF_B VSUS
Vs/Va
BACK_EEP AND VADR
Trans
C Sensor PD PD
ASIC ADDRESS
DRIVE DRIVE
DCDC/REG
SCAN SCAN
Periphery of the IF, Main and Module microcomputers are operated.

The user operation is invalid due to Main Switch off.
AC-ON Main Power ON, Passive Standby
ON OFF
D V+3_4V_STB
Front LED: RED LED STB
IR AC_DET Trans
KEY IF ucom SW
V+6_5V
SW Main
Microcomputer CEC ACTIVE "Kill me"
M_SW_DET_B
RLS Switch
output port setting
RST3
IF: ACTIVE OFF AND EMG_DDC COLOR-S REG
DCDC/REG (*)
Main: RELAY2 OFF Main_ RST4
ucom M_SW_DET
Main: PSW1 OFF DCDC/REG PC RGB-SW
EEPROM
PSW1
Module: RELAY1•KDD OFF A.TUNER
A.D.TUNER
Module: DRF_B OFF RST2
VDEC COFDEM
MPX
COFDEM
D.TUNER
HDMI DEMOD
CIF TEMP2
BCM AD D - AMP
ASIC BCM(HD)
BCM RELAY
Microcomputer MSP
MAP
E input port state Main ucom
Main: RST4 Digital RELAY2
OFF OR
RELAY1 RELAY
Main: RST2 OFF •KDD
Module: RST2 OFF
PS_PD
PS_PD/PD_TRG_B
EEPROM OR EXT_PD
EXT_PD V+17V
Module_
RST2 PD V+12V
(*): PRO-111FD only ucom Vcc
V+6_5V
DAC DCDC/REG Trans
ASIC
TEMP1 VSUS
DRF_B Vs/Va
BACK_EEP AND VADR
Trans
Sensor PD PD
ASIC ADDRESS
DRIVE DRIVE
DCDC/REG
SCAN SCAN
F
Only the periphery of the IF microcomputer is electrified.
The user operation is valid.
46 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
AC-ON Main Power ON, Active Standby

ON OFF
V+3_4V_STB
IR AC_DET Trans
KEY IF ucom SW
V+6_5V
Microcomputer CEC
SW
ACTIVE
Main
M_SW_DET_B Switch
output port setting RLS
IF: ACTIVE ON RST3
Main: RELAY2 OFF Main_ RST4
DCDC/REG (*)
Main: PSW1 OFF ucom
RGB-SW M_SW_DET
EEPROM DCDC/REG PC
Module: RELAY1•KDD OFF PSW1
A.TUNER
A.D.TUNER FAN IO_AUDIO AV - SW
Module: DRF_B OFF A.D.TUNER B
RST2 COFDEM
MPX
VDEC COFDEM
D.TUNER
DEMOD
CIF
HDMI BCM AD TEMP2 D- AMP
Microcomputer ASIC BCM(HD)
BCM RELAY
input port state MSP
MAP
Main "POF"
ucom
Main: RST4 OFF RELAY2
Digital
Main: RST2 OFF RELAY1 OR RELAY
•KDD
Module: RST2 OFF
PS_PD
PS_PD/PD_TRG_B
EEPROM OR EXT_PD
EXT_PD V+17V
Module_
(*): PRO-111FD only RST2 PD V+12V
ucom Vcc
V+6_5V
DAC DCDC/REG Trans
ASIC
TEMP1 VSUS
DRF_B Vs/Va
BACK_EEP AND VADR
Trans
Sensor PD PD
X/Y Drive, SCAN Address C
ASIC ADDRESS
DRIVE DRIVE
DCDC/REG
SCAN SCAN
Periphery of the IF, Main and Module microcomputers are operated.

AC-ON Main Power ON, Function Standby

ON OFF
V+3_4V_STB
Power supply V+5_1V_STB AC D
IR AC_DET Trans
KEY IF ucom SW
V+6_5V
SW Main
CEC ACTIVE M_SW_DET_B
Microcomputer RLS Switch
output port setting
RST3
IF: ACTIVE ON DCDC/REG (*)
Main_ RST4
Main: RELAY2 ON ucom
DCDC/REG PC RGB-SW M_SW_DET
Main: PSW1 OFF EEPROM
PSW1
Module: RELAY1•KDD OFF A.TUNER
RST2 A.D.TUNER
Module: DRF_B OFF VDEC COFDEM
MPX
COFDEM
D.TUNER
HDMI DEMOD
CIF TEMP2
BCM AD D- AMP
ASIC BCM(HD)
BCM RELAY
Microcomputer MSP
MAP
Main "POF"
input port state ucom
Digital RELAY2 E
Main: RST4 ON RELAY1 OR RELAY
Main: RST2 •KDD
OFF
Module: RST2 OFF
PS_PD
PS_PD/PD_TRG_B
EEPROM OR EXT_PD
EXT_PD V+17V
Module_
RST2 PD V+12V
ucom Vcc
V+6_5V
(*): PRO-111FD only DAC DCDC/REG Trans
ASIC
TEMP1 VSUS
DRF_B Vs/Va
BACK_EEP AND VADR
Trans
Sensor PD PD
ASIC ADDRESS
DRIVE DRIVE
DCDC/REG
SCAN SCAN
Standby power device and some Vcc power devices operate. F

RGB-SW/AD/D-AMP/MAP are electrified, but uses the power-saving mode function of the IC.
PDP-5020FD 47
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
AC-ON Main Power ON, PDP Screen ON
ON OFF
V+3_4V_STB
Front LED: BLUE LED STB
IR AC_DET Trans
KEY IF ucom SW
V+6_5V
Microcomputer 232C SW
M_SW_DET AC_DET
CEC Main
output port setting ACTIVE M_SW_DET_B
RLS Switch
IF: ACTIVE ON
RST3
Main: RELAY2 ON AND EMG_DDC COLOR-S REG
DCDC/REG (*)
ON Main_ RST4
Main: PSW1
ucom M_SW_DET
Module: RELAY1•KDD ON DCDC/REG PC RGB-SW
EEPROM
PSW1
Module: DRF_B ON A.TUNER
B A.D.TUNER
RST2 COFDEM
MPX
VDEC COFDEM
D.TUNER
DEMOD
CIF
Microcomputer HDMI BCM AD TEMP2 D- AMP
BCM(HD)
BCM RELAY
input port state ASIC MSP
MAP
Main: RST4 ON Main "PON"
ucom
Digital RELAY2
Main: RST2 ON OR
RELAY1 RELAY
Module: RST2 ON •KDD
PS_PD
PS_PD/PD_TRG_B
EEPROM OR EXT_PD
EXT_PD V+17V
Module_
(*): PRO-111FD only RST2 PD V+12V
ucom Vcc
V+6_5V
DAC DCDC/REG Trans
ASIC
TEMP1 VSUS
DRF_B Vs/Va
BACK_EEP AND VADR
Trans
Sensor PD PD
C X/Y Drive, SCAN Address
ASIC ADDRESS
DRIVE DRIVE
DCDC/REG
SCAN SCAN
All devices are operated.
48 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
5.2 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART OF FAILURE ANALYSIS
A
[1] WHOLE UNIT
Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Whole Unit
START Note: Check that the Main power SW is ON side.
Problems concerning STB status
Yes When the panel drive-power is in OFF state, there will be no PD,
A power-down occurs. See "5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN)." except PS_PD.
No
B
Yes
A shutdown occurs. See "5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN)."
No
No Is STB 3.4 V power supplied? No Check if the cable that connects NG Failure analysis for the
Is the STB LED lit? (Check the power at the IF micro- the POWER SUPPLY and MAIN POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS1
computer on the MAIN Assy.) Assys is firmly connected.
Yes
The green/red LEDs on the DIGITAL Assy indicate ON/STB
Yes
of the panel and causes for a power-down or shutdown.
If neither the green nor red LED lights, it is likely that the
power to the STB system is not supplied. (failure, PASV-STB status)
Are the voltages at AC_DET and
MSW_DET on the POWER No Replace the POWER SUPPLY
SUPPLY Unit high? Unit.
C
Yes If AC_DET or MSW_DET is Low, LED goes off.
Failure analysis for the

MAIN Assy => MA1
Problems concerning the power
Is the voltage at the RELAY port

Can the unit be turned on No of the connectors between the No Failure analysis for the
(Relay ON)? DIGITAL Assy and POWER MAIN Assy => MA2
Yes SUPPLY Unit H (3.4 V)? In the power startup, the Main microcomputer
controls a relay port earlier than module
Yes
microcomputer.
Failure analysis for the D

POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS2
When the panel drive-power is in OFF state, there will be no PD,

Yes
A power-down occurs. See "5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN)." except PS_PD.
No
Yes
A shutdown occurs. See "5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN)."
No
Problems concerning lighting of the panel
(*1): As reset lighting of the 9th-generation panel is faint,

reduce the ambient lighting when checking the display. E
• Check the DRF SW.

Does the screen display reset No Yes • Before turning the drive off with the RS-232C
Is the drive off? Turn the drive on.
lighting? (*1) commands or using the remote control unit,
turn the unit off.
Yes No

drive system => DR1
In a case where luminescent spots appear

Is the panel arbitrary turned on or Yes Failure analysis for the or the panel is repeatedly turned on or off.
off repeatedly? Or do luminescent POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS3
spots appear on the screen?
In a case where luminescent spots appear.
No F
Yes drive system => DR2
A
PDP-5020FD 49
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Is there any local abnormality Yes Is the abnormality associated No Is the abnormality associated No
Replace the panel chassis.
on the screen? with one ADDRESS or one TCP? with one scan IC block?
No Yes Yes
Failure analysis for the Failure analysis for the

drive system => DR3 drive system => DR4
In the subsequent diagnostic steps, it is most likely that the multi base section is in failure.
B Problems concerning video display
Is the panel mask properly No Failure analysis for the

displayed? drive system => DR2
Yes
• Check with the combination of the animated/slanting ramp or other mask patterns and mirror function.
* Animated pattern: For checking erroneously discharged cells, load change is constantly caused on a screen.
* Ramp pattern: For checking gradation expression
* Mirror function: For checking if a defective indication is interlocked with mirror inversion, in order to identify a defective point
Is the on-screen display (OSD) No Failure analysis for the

properly displayed? DIGITAL Assy => DG1
Yes
C Check on the Factory menu.
Is an external video signal No Failure analysis for the

displayed properly? MAIN Assy => MA3
Yes
Problems concerning the audio output
No Failure analysis for the

Is the audio signal output?
audio system => AU1
Yes
D Specific failure whose cause is

difficult to identify in the initial stage
50 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[2] POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The POWER SUPPLY Unit

POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS1 STB 3.4 V power is not output.
Is the cable connected firmly to No Properly connect the cable between

the P7 connector? the P7 and M2 connectors.
Yes
Check the voltage at the MAIN Assy and
Is the cable to the P7 connector Yes
Replace the defective cable (J109). POWER SUPPLY Unit. B
broken?
No
Yes Replace the POWER SUPPLY

Is the fuse (F102) blown?
Unit.
No
Check the resistance between D112 cathode
Is one of the limiting resistors Yes Replace the POWER SUPPLY
and JW194 (jumper),
(R126) blown? Unit. using a tester.
No
The POWER SUPPLY Unit is

normal.
Failure analysis for the The power is not on, even though
POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS2 the RELAY port is active.
• Check the relay operation at the JW281

No Replace the POWER SUPPLY
Is the relay (RY102) on? (jumper). (Voltage: 5 V)
Unit. • Check the relay sound (click).
Yes
• Check the voltage between the JW154
No Replace the POWER SUPPLY
Is the PFC voltage normal? (jumper) (-) and JW139 (jumper) (+).
Unit. • The voltage must be around 400 V.
(340V or less are defective.)
Yes
Caution: High voltage!
D
normal.
Failure analysis for the The cells of the panel do not

POWER SUPPLY Unit => PS3 light normally.
The specified voltage values are between

Is the VADR voltage within the No Replace the POWER SUPPLY 72 and 78 V.
specified values? Unit.
Yes
The ripple must be within 5 V. E
Is there a fluctuation in the Yes Replace the POWER SUPPLY
VADR voltage? Unit.
No
The specified voltage values are between
Is the VSUS voltage within the No Replace the POWER SUPPLY 200 and 210 V (VSU: 125/35°C).
specified range? Unit.
Yes
The ripple must be within 10 V.
Is there a fluctuation in the Yes Replace the POWER SUPPLY
VSUS voltage? Unit.
No

normal. F
PDP-5020FD 51
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[3] DRIVE ASSY
Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Drive Assy

drive system => DR1
Reset lighting is not displayed.
B X/Y DRIVE Assys
Is the waveform normal when the No Are the FFC cables properly No
Properly connect the FFC cables.
voltage is applied to the panel? connected?
Yes Yes NG
Are the panel FPC and SCAN Assys No Properly connect the panel FPC No
Is the input signal normal? Replace the FFC cables.
connectors properly connected to and SCAN Assys connectors.
the X/Y DRIVE Assys?
NG Yes NG
Yes
C
Replace the panel chassis. Replace the X/Y DRIVE Assys. Replace the DIGITAL Assy.
52 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
drive system => DR2
Abnormality across the whole

screen such as luminescent spots.
Is the adjustment value of each No To "8.4. Adjustment when the Service

voltage within the appropriate range? Panel Assy is Replaced"
* Using ADJ1 on the Panel Factory menu or the QAJ When go forward to the section "8.4 Adjustment when the service panel Assy
command, check if the adjustment value is within the is replaced" from this step, please be careful to the following items.
range described in the table below • Do not clear hour meter and pulse meter. B
(for readjustment in the panel non-replacement)
• Input a setting value of label mention example as preparations
Yes
(because a product panel does not have a label)
Because it is difficult to identify which drive is in failure, follow the flowchart below to check each Assy.
Y DRIVE Assy / SCAN Assy X DRIVE Assy ADDRESS Assy
Y DRIVE Assy B C
C
Are all the connectors properly No
Reconnect the connectors.
connected?
Yes
Is the VH set voltage (140 V) No

Set the VH voltage correctly.
correctly set?
Yes
Is the output value of each voltage No

from the Y DRIVE Assy appropriate?
Yes • Compare the measurement value at the last output stage of each D
voltage against the value calculated using the measurement value
of the DAC output voltage. (See the table below.)
• There may be a case where the setting of a Adjustable resistor on
the Assy is out of range.
Another Assy may

Is the waveform normal when the
be in failure.
voltage is applied to the panel?
(See the oscilloscope photos.)
No
Is the input signal normal? No

Replace the FFC cables.
Yes NG
E
Replace the DIGITAL Assy.
Is the waveform of the control

No
signal from the SCAN Assy normal? Replace the Y DRIVE Assy.
Yes
Replace the SCAN IC.
F
D
PDP-5020FD 53
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
B X DRIVE Assy

connected?
Yes
Is the output value of each voltage No

from the X DRIVE Assy appropriate?
• Compare the measurement value at the last output stage of each
D Yes voltage against the value calculated using the measurement value
of the DAC output voltage. (See the table below.)
• There may be a case where the setting of a Adjustable resistor on
B the Assy is out of range.
Another Assy may
Is the waveform normal when the
be in failure.
voltage is applied to the panel?
No
Is the input signal normal? Yes

Replace the X DRIVE Assy.
No
NG
C
C ADDRESS Assy

connected?
Yes No
D Is the TCP control signal normal? No Is the input signal normal?

(See the oscilloscope photos.) (See the oscilloscope photos.)
Yes Yes No
Replace the panel chassis. NG * Waveform such as the

signal is OK for an
LVDS signal.
54 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Adjustable Range Measurement Point Computation Formula for Voltage (Absolute Value)
Voltage to be
Assy Name Output at the Computation Using Computation Using Adjustment
Checked (V) 60-inch 50-inch DAC Output (*2)
Last Stage DAC Output Voltage (V) Value (*4)
VSNOFS 040 to 085 101 to 157 CN2404 (*1) Lower side of R2723 (*3) VOFS_ADJ × 13.91 + 55.54 VOF value × 0.18 + 9.6
VYRST 001 to 056 001 to 074 CN2401 (*1) Upper side of R2621 (*3) VYPRST_ADJ × 62.495 + 75.2 VRP value × 0.81 + 74.4
VKNOFS1_2 054 to 107 121 to 164 CN2405 (*1) Left side of R2754 (*3) YVKNOFS1_ADJ × 36.85 + 159.3 (V1F value+VYF value-128)
Y DRIVE
× 0.48 + 158.8
Assy
VKNOFS3 065 to 117 107 to 149 CN2403 (*1) Right side of R2757 (*3) YVKNOFS3_ADJ × 36.85 + 159.3 (V3F value+VYF value-128)
× 0.48 + 158.8
VKNOFS4 111 to 164 151 to 193 CN2406 (*1) Right side of R2755 (*3) YVKNOFS4_ADJ × 36.85 + 159.3 (V4F value+VYF value-128)
× 0.48 + 158.8
B
X DRIVE XKOFS1 105 085 CN1302 (*1) K1402 (*1) XKNOFS1_ADJ × 27.3 + 30 VX1 value × 0.35 + 29.7
Assy XKOFS2 063 047 CN1301 (*1) K1401 (*1) XKNOFS2_ADJ × 25.0 + 69.8 VX2 value × 0.32 + 69.5
(*1): These parts have not been mounted. (*4): The value calculated using an adjustment value may be different from the
(*2): It is recommended to measure the DAC output voltage with the drive off. value measured at the last output stage, because various corrections such
(*3): View when the Assy is mounted on the unit and viewed from the rear. as temperature correction are not taken into consideration.
Diagrammatic view of the Y DRIVE Assy Diagrammatic view of the X DRIVE Assy
C
A R2754,R2755,R2757
B R2723
C R2621
D CN2405
E D A F E CN2403,CN2406
F CN2404
G CN2401
H K1401
G
I K1402
B J CN1301,CN1302
C
PDP-5020FD 55
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Diagnose the ADDRESS Assy.

drive system => DR3
The abnormality is associated with

one ADDRESS or one TCP.
No Are the FFC cables properly No

Is the TCP control signal normal? Properly connect the FFC cables.
connected?
Yes Yes NG
B
If the FFC cable that connects the DIGITAL and ADDRESS Assys is in failure,
NG the abnormality is associated with one address in most cases.
Replace the panel chassis. Replace the DIGITAL Assy.
In most cases of damage on one line,

the panel chassis must be replaced.
Diagnose the SCAN Assy.

drive system => DR4
C
The abnormality is associated
with a single scan line.
Is the waveform normal when the No Is the 15P connector connected No

Reconnect the connector properly.
voltage is applied to the panel? properly to the socket?
Yes NG
Note1
Yes
Is the waveform of the SCAN IC No

Replace the Y DRIVE Assy.
control signal from the Y DRIVE
Assy normal?
D
Yes
Replace the SCAN IC.
NG
Replace the panel chassis.
Note 1:
IC No. Line Number Object Line
In a case where confirmation of the waveform for a particular line is impossible with No 1 66 0001 to 0066
an oscilloscope, it is possible to identify a defective line by lighting a particular line, No 2 68 0067 to 0134
E using the following commands: (The SCAN IC outputting each line refers to the table.)
No 3 68 0135 to 0202
PON
FAY No 4 68 0203 to 0270
MKRS01 No 5 68 0271 to 0338
BSMS01 (Command for reducing phosphor burn-in) No 6 68 0339 to 0406
$250000∗∗∗∗ (In place of ∗∗∗∗, input a figure between 0001 and 1080, which denotes
an ordinal number of a particular line.) No 7 68 0407 to 0474
No 8 66 0475 to 0540
With the above commands, a particular line lights. Be careful to light a line for as No 9 66 0541 to 0606
short a time as possible, to avoid phosphor burn-in.
After a particular line is identified, display an all-white screen to protect the screen No 10 68 0607 to 0674
from burn-in. No 11 68 0675 to 0742
No 12 68 0743 to 0810
No 13 68 0811 to 0878
F No 14 68 0879 to 0946
No 15 68 0947 to 1014
No 16 66 1015 to 1080
56 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[4] DIGITAL ASSY
Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The DIGITAL Assy

DIGITAL Assy => DG1
• If the OSD is not properly displayed although the panel mask is properly displayed,
The on-screen display (OSD) is a failure exists in the path from the output of IC2801 on the MAIN Assy to IC3301 on the DIGITAL Assy.
not properly indicated. -> If only the OSD is abnormal, the MAIN Assy is in failure.
Disconnect and reconnect the

50P (J212) FFC/40P (J211) FFC. B
NG
Replace the 50P (J212) FFC/

40P (J211) FFC.
NG
Is an appropriate signal input? Yes

(Check the V frequency with the • If no vertical sync signal is input to the DIGITAL Assy,
QSI command.) a freeze-frame picture will be displayed.
No
Is the sync signal properly output No

from the MAIN Assy? C
No NG OK
• It is most likely that the video signal
and sync signal data are abnormal.
Failure in connectors CN3201 or

Replace the MAIN Assy.
CN3202 on the DIGITAL Assy.
Failure in ASIC (IC3301) on the
DIGITAL Assy.
PDP-5020FD 57
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[5] MAIN ASSY
Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The MAIN Assy

MAIN Assy => MA1
The STB LED does not light although

STB 3.4 V power is supplied.
No
Does the POWER switch on? Turn the POWER switch on.
B
Yes
No Failure in the RST IC (IC8302) output or its peripheral circuits
Is resetting of the IF Replace the MAIN Assy.
microcomputer canceled?
Yes
No Failure in the line between the IF microcomputer and M11 connector
Is the voltage at Pin 3 of the M11 Replace the MAIN Assy.
connector High?
Yes
Is the M11 connector securely No

Securely connect the M11 connector.
connected?
Yes
Is the cable that is connected to Yes
the M11 connector broken? Replace the cable (J116).
C
No
No problem with the MAIN Assy.
Check the LED Assy.

MAIN Assy => MA2
The RELAY port does not work.

The power is not turned on.
D
No Relay control is unable unless it supplies a power supply to the module microcompute.
Is the voltage at Pin 50 of the M4 Replace the MAIN Assy.
connector 3.4 V?
Yes
Are the voltages (1.5 V/2.5 V/3.4 V) No Replace the MAIN Assy.
supplied to the main microcomputer?
Yes
Is voltage at REQ_IF on the MAIN No Can the unit be turned on, using No Replace the cable (J117) that NG Replace the IR Assy.
Assy High (3.3 V)? the remote control unit? connects between the IR and
MAIN Assys.
Yes Yes NG

E
Can the unit be turned on, using No Replace the cable (J116) that NG
Replace the SIDE KEY Assy.
the Power switch on the unit? connects between the SIDE KEY
Yes and MAIN Assys. NG
Can the unit be turned on, using No Replace the 50P cable (J213) that NG Replace the IO Assy.
RS-232C commands? connects between the IO and
MAIN Assys. NG
F
58 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Video System

MAIN Assy => MA3
The input signal is not displayed.
Is the selected input signal a Yes

=> ATV
terrestrial analog TV?
No
B
=> COMP / S1
composite signal?
No

=> COMP / S1
S-video signal?
No

=> COMP / PC1
component signal?
No
Is the selected input signal an Yes

=> COMP / PC2 C
PC signal?
No

=> DTV 1
digital TV signal?
No
Yes
Does a block noise occur? => DTV 2
No
Yes Are the data displayed on the No After changing the source NG
Is the selected input signal an
"HDMI SIGNAL INFO" page of equipment, check the "HDMI Replace the MAIN Assy.
HDMI signal?
the Factory menu correct? SIGNAL INFO" data again.
No D
Yes OK
The source equipment previously

used is in failure.
No problem with the MAIN Assy.
Does the result of SIG mode No No

Is the sync signal output from Replace the MAIN Assy.
detection on the Factory menu
IC4901?
coincide with the input signal data?
Yes
Yes
No
Replace the MAIN Assy. Is the sync signal input to IC6501? Replace the MAIN Assy.
Yes E
Are the data displayed when using No

=> HMG
the Home Media Gallery function?
Yes
No problem with the MAIN Assy
PDP-5020FD 59
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[6] VIDEO SYSTEM
Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Video System
=> ATV
Analog tuner signal is not

displayed on the screen.
Yes
Is the input selecter set to TV? No Set the Input selector to TV.
B (Analog) (Analog)
Yes
Is a signal input to IC8001 No No
Has the signal arrived at TP5337? Replace the U5301 (TUNER).
(AVSW)? (pin 57)
1
Yes Yes
No Check the 40P FFC (J214) between the MAIN Assy and IO Assy.
Is a signal input to TP7558?
If there was problem, replace it.
Is a HS signal input to IC6811 No Has the signal arrived at Q5306 No No

Has the signal arrived at C5363. Replace the U5301 (TUNER).
(IFUCOM)? (pin 3) collector?
2
Yes
C Which signal is not output, SUB

main or sub signal?
MAIN
Is a signal output from IC8001? No Check around IC8001 and check the communications No Is a signal output from IC4601?
(AVSW) (pin 45) between IC8001 and microcomuputer. (pin 49)
3 If there was no ploblem, replace the IO Assy. 3
Yes Yes
Has the signal arrived at IC4702? No Check the 40P FFC (J214) between MAIN Assy and IO No Has the signal arrived at IC4702?
(VDEC) (pin 22) Assy. If there was problem, replace it. (pin 70)
4 4
Yes Yes
Are the data output from IC4702? No Check around IC4702 and check the communications
No Are the data output from IC4702?
(VDEC) (pins 93 to 97, 99 to 104, between IC4702 and microcomuputer.
D (pins 79 to 86, 88 to 90)
107 to 109) If there was no ploblem, replace the MAIN Assy.
5 5
Yes
Is the communication between Check around the IC that is found to have failure in
No
each IC (VDEC, ASIC) on the communication and the microcomputer.
MAIN Assy and the microcomputer If there was no ploblem, replace the MAIN Assy.
normal?
Yes
Waveforms
Replace the MAIN Assy. Input signal: NTSC Color-bar (Analog tuner)
1 IC8001 - pin 57 (in) 2 IC6811 - pin 3 3 IC8001 - pins 45, 49 (out)
V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div V: 1 V/div H: 10 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div
4 IC4702 - pins 22, 70 5 IC4702 (out)

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div V: 1 V/div H: 2 μsec/div
60 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
=> COMP/S1
Image for the composite or S-video

signal is not displayed.
Yes
Is the function correspondeing to No Select the corresponding signal

selected signal input selected? with the Input selector.
Yes
Has the signal arrived at IC8001? No NG

Check around the input terminals. Replace the IO Assy. B
(AVSW)
6 7
Yes
Which signal is not output, SUB No

Is the screen of main side Tuner?
main or sub signal?
MAIN Yes
Specifications that does not
display in the sub-side.
Is a signal output from IC8001? No Check around IC8001 and check the communications No Is a signal output from IC8001?
(AVSW) (pins 42, 45) between IC8001 and microcomuputer. (pins 47, 49)
8 9 If there was no ploblem, replace the IO Assy. 12 13
Yes Yes
C
Has the signal arrived at IC4702? No Check the 40P FFC (J214) between MAIN Assy and No Has the signal arrived at IC4702?
(VDEC) (pins 22, 26) IO Assy. If there was problem, replace it. (pins 69, 70)
10 11 14 15
Yes Yes
No
each IC (VDEC, ASIC) on the communication and the microcomputer.
normal?
Yes
Waveforms
Input signal: NTSC Color-bar (S termial)
6 IC8001 - pin 68 (Y) 7 IC8001 - pin 70 (C) 8 IC8001 - pin 45 (Main Y) 9 IC8001 - pin 42 (Main C) 10 IC4702 - pin 22 (Main Y)
V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div
11 IC4702 - pin 26 (Main C) 12 IC8001 - pin 49 (Sub Y) 13 IC8001 - pin 47 (Sub C) 14 IC4702 - pin 70 (Sub Y) 15 IC4702 - pin 69 (Sub C)
PDP-5020FD 61
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
=> COMP/PC1
Image for the component signal

is not displayed.
Yes
Is the function corresponding to No Select the corresponding signal

selected signal input selected? with the input selector.
Yes
B Has the signal arrived at IC8101? No NG
(RGBSW) (pins 86, 88, 90) Check around the input terminals. Replace the IO Assy.
16 17 18
Yes
Which signal is not output, SUB No Specifications that does not

main or sub signal? display in the sub-side.
MAIN Yes
Is a signal output from IC8101? No Check around IC8101 and check the communications
(RGBSW) (pins 30, 32, 34) between IC8101 and microcomuputer.
If there was no ploblem, replace the IO Assy.
19 20 21
Yes
C
Has the signal arrived at IC4801? No Check the 40P FFC (J214) between MAIN Assy and
(ADC) (pins 43, 48, 54) IO Assy. If there was problem, replace it.
22 23 24
Yes
No
each IC (ADC, ASIC) on the communication and the microcomputer.
normal?
Yes
Waveforms
Input signal: Color-bar (Component 720p/50 Hz)
16 IC8101 - pin 86 (Y) 17 IC8101 - pin 88 (Pb) 18 IC8101 - pin 90 (Pr) 19 IC8101 - pin 34 (Y) 20 IC8101 - pin 32 (Pb)
21 IC8101 - pin 30 (Pr) 22 IC4801 - pin 48 (Y) 23 IC4801 - pin 43 (Pb) 24 IC4801 - pin 54 (Pr)
V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 20 μsec/div
62 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
=> COMP/PC2
Image for the PC signals is not

displayed.
Yes
Is the function corresponding to No Select the corresponding signal

selected signal input selected? with the input selector.
Yes
Has the signal arrived at IC8101? No Check the 12P FFC (J215) between IO Assy and
(RGBSW) (pins 2, 4, 6, 14, 15) PC. If there was problem, replace it. B
25 26 27 28 29
Yes
Which signal is not output, SUB No Specifications that does not

main or sub signal? display in the sub-side.
MAIN Yes
Is a signal output from IC8101? No Check around IC8101 and check the communications
(RGBSW) (pins 30, 32, 34) between IC8101 and microcomuputer.
If there was no ploblem, replace the IO Assy.
30 31 32
Yes
C
Has the signal arrived at IC4801? No Check the 40P FFC (J214) between MAIN Assy and
(ADC) (pins 43, 48, 54) IO Assy. If there was problem, replace it.
33 34 35
Yes
No
each IC (ADC, ASIC) on the communication and the microcomputer.
normal?
Yes
Waveforms D
Input signal: Color-bar (PC SXGA/60 Hz)
25 IC8101 - pin 2 (G in) 26 IC8101 - pin 4 (B in) 27 IC8101 - pin 6 (R in) 28 IC8101 - pin 14 (HD in) 29 IC8101 - pin 15 (VD in)
V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div V: 1 V/div H: 10 μsec/div V: 1 V/div H: 2 msec/div
(polarity is no care) (polarity is no care)
30 IC8101 - pin 34 (G out) 31 IC8101 - pin 32 (B out) 32 IC8101 - pin 30 (R out) 33 IC4801 - pin 48 (G) 34 IC4801 - pin 43 (B)
35 IC4801 - pin 54 (R)

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 μsec/div
PDP-5020FD 63
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
=> DTV 1
Digital tuner signal is not

displayed on the screen.
Yes
Is the input selecter set to No Select the TV/DTV selector
TV/DTV? to DTV input.
B Yes
Is the symptom cleared if connection Yes Poor connection of the

of the RF IN connector is secured or connectors or defective cable
the RF cable is replaced?
No
Is the DTV-related menu displayed No

on the home menu?
Yes
With a DTV channel selected, are the No Is the periphery of the terrestrial- No
level and quality of the DTV channel broadcast tuner defective?
displayed on the Home Menu high
enough?
Yes
C
=> DTV 2
Block noise is generated in the

digital tuner.
D Yes
Is an uncorrected error No An error may be generated in the B.E. block

generated? (after the demodulation TS is output).
Yes
Replace the MAIN Assy and No

Defective MAIN Assy
check if the symptom persists.
Yes
Is the input level high enough? No [Checking of the reception environment]

(IF_AGC check) • Does the input level become high when the antenna is reoriented?
• Is the signal loss large because multiple distributors are used?
Yes • When a booster or attenuator is added, is the symptom cleared?
• Is the RF cable defective?
E • When the dressing of the RF cable is modified, does the level fluctuate?
Is the C/N value high enough? No [Checking of the reception environment]

(C/N check) • Is the C/N value affected by a wireless LAN or other ambient electromagnetic waves?
• When the dressing of the RF cable is modified, does the C/N value fluctuate?
• When the RF cable is shortened as much as possible, is the symptom cleared?
Yes
If IF_AGC level and C/N value are

high enough, block noise is not
usually generated.
64 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Details on how to confirm the factory DTV tuning status A
Generation of block noise
Screen example of DTV Tuning Status (Two-pages)

Check the modulation method with which block noise is generated.
QAM256 QAM64 VSB8
Is generation of noise dependent on the modulation method?
Check the frequency at which block noise is generated.
All channels Only at a certain frequency Not generated
Is generation of noise dependent on the frequency?
Depending on how block noise is generated, obtain the DTV tuning status.
(Two-page screen data, as indicated on the right)
B
Obtain the DTV tuning status for QAM256 and QAM64, regardless of whether noise
is generated or not. With a terrestrial- broadcast wave, obtain the status for VSB8 only.
Then, if noise is generated at a certain frequency but not generated at another
frequency even though the modulation method is the same, obtain the statuses for
both frequencies.
Timing of obtaining a status is 60 sec after the beginning of measurement.
Resetting of a measurement value can be done with the "k" or "l" key.
How to check the frequency and modulation method and how to obtain the status
• Is generation of block noise dependent on the frequency/modulation method?
→ Check the "Frequency" and "Modulation" items.
• Is the input level high enough? → Check the "IF AGC" item.
• Is the signal quality high? → Check the "C/N," "Error," and "BER" items.
C
Factory Press the Factory key.
INITIALIZE Press the Mute key three times.
DTB SERVICE MODE Press the "j" key twice then the Enter key.
Digital Tuner Service Menu Press the "l" key to select YES for MODE SHIFT then hold the Enter key pressed for several seconds.
Digital Select Digital from the menu then press the Enter key.
DTV Tuning Status Select DTV Tuning Status from the menu then press the Enter key.
Is block noise generated at a particular frequency or on all channels?
Frequency If only at a particular frequency, a wireless LAN or another ambient electromagnetic disturbing
Check the frequency. wave, such as a terrestrial-broadcast wave, may disturb the reception. If on all channels, the Assy
may be defective. → Replace the Assy and check the status to see if the symptom is cleared.
With a cable modem, is block noise generated with QAM256 or QAM64 or both?
Check the modulation If noise is generated with either of them, the signal quality of the transmitting device may be low.
Modulation If noise is generated only with QAM256, the reception level or the C/N value may be low.
method. D
If noise is generated with VSB8, multiple paths may be the cause.
Check the status of the Check if LOCK is indicated.

FEC LOCK Even if block noise is generated, LOCK is indicated if a picture is displayed.
demodulation IC.
Is the IF AGC voltage level high enough? The following table provides an indication of the level.
QAM256 QAM64 VSB8
less than 50 less than 55 less than 60
Check the IF AGC If the levels fall into the above ranges, usually noise is not generated (use the above ranges only as a guide.
IF AGC They vary depending on the frequency).
voltage. If noise is generated even though the signal level is sufficient, ambient electromagnetic waves or multiple paths may
be the cause.
If the levels of all channels are low, the level of signal input to the ANT connector may be low.
Check the input signal level with a spectrum analyzer.
Is the C/N value high enough? The following table provides an indication of the level.
QAM256 QAM64 VSB8
C/N Check the C/N value. more than 30 more than 25 more than 18
If the level falls into the above ranges, usually noise is not generated (use the above ranges only as a guide.
They vary depending on the frequency).
E
Was a PreFEC error actually generated?
Check the count of a QAM256 QAM64 VSB8
Corrected Error PreFEC error. Indication - - -
Was a PostFEC error actually generated? The following table provides an indication of the level.
QAM256 QAM64 VSB8
Check the count of a 0 0 0
Uncorrected Error If the level falls into the above ranges, usually noise is not generated.
PostFEC error.
If noise is generated even though the error count is zero, an error may be generated at the B.E. block
(after the demodulation TS is output).
Was a PreFEC error actually generated? The following table provides an indication of the level.
Check BER of a QAM256 QAM64 VSB8
BER(Pre) less than 1.000e-06 less than 1.000e-06 less than 1.000e-04
PreFEC error. If the level falls into the above ranges, usually noise is not generated (use the above ranges only as a guide.
Was a PostFEC error actually generated? The following table provides an indication of the level.
QAM256 QAM64 VSB8
Check BER of a 0.000e + 00 0.000e + 00 0.000e + 00
BER(Post) PostFEC error. If the level falls into the above ranges, usually noise is not generated (use the above ranges only as a guide. F
If noise is generated even though the value is in the range of 0.0E-00, an error may be generated at the B.E. block
(after the demodulation TS is output).
Time Measurement time Accumulated measurement time
PDP-5020FD 65
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[7] HOME MEDIA GALLERY
Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The HMG
=> HMG
No image during the HMG

function.
No
Is a DTV signal properly received? To the check items for DTV
B Yes
Go to Ethernet .
USB
Are the data being played back in No

conformity with the standards for this The data cannot be played back.
unit?
Yes Yes
Is the symptom dependant on (dependant)
Limit of this unit's specifications
USB device?
No (not dependant)
Is the filesystem of the USB memory No

Reformat the USB memory device.
device in conformity with the specifi-
C cations for this unit?
Yes
Does the unit operate properly No
Defective USB device.
with another Main Assy?
Yes
Is the USB cable in proper No No
Defective USB cable. Replace the USB cable.
condition?
Yes
Is power (5 V) supplied to the No Defective power supply circuit No

USB memory device? Replace the MAIN Assy.
for USB (VBUS).
Yes
D
Is the USB device name displayed No Defective USB section of the No
on the Factory screen? Replace the MAIN Assy.
BCM7404.
Yes
Defective decoding section of the

BCM7404.
66 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Ethernet
Can network functions be used No

with the PC (server) without any Defective network board of the PC.
problem?
Yes
Is the Link LED of the Ethernet No No
Is the cable OK? Problem with the cable.
terminal on the server side lit?
Yes Yes
Defective Ethernet section on the Replace the MAIN Assy. B

MAIN Assy
Is the MAC Address [00:e0:36:**:**:**] No The data specific to the MAIN No

displayed on the network Setup Assy have been deleted.
screen?
Yes
No
Is the HMG Setup correctly set? Improper HMG Setup.
Yes
Can the server be selected (not No Is the PC recognized by the server No Check the settings of the server
grayed out) from the PDP? as a device? again.
Yes C
Can the files on the server be Check the settings of the shared
recognized? folder for the server again.
Yes
Defective decoding section of the Replace the MAIN Assy.

BCM7404.
Yes
Are the properties of the files No Defective Ethernet section of the No

displayed on the Factory screen? Replace the MAIN Assy.
BCM7404.
Yes
Defective decoding section of the D

BCM7404.
[HMG] How to enter DTB Service menu

Note: Use the remote control unit that supports Factory mode, because the DTB Service menu is accessible from Factory mode.
Step 1: Press the Factory key on the remote control unit to display the INFORMATION screen of Factory mode.
Step 2: Press the Mute key on the remote control unit 3 times to display the INITIALIZE screen.
Step 3: Press the j key on the remote control unit twice to display the “DTB SERVICE MODE (+)” indication at the bottom of the screen. E
Step 4: Press the ENTER/SET key on the remote control unit to display the “MODE SHIFT <=>: No” indication at the bottom of the screen.
Step 5: Press the k or l key on the remote control unit until the “MODE SHIFT <=>: YES” indication is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Step 6: Press and hold the ENTER/SET key on the remote control unit pressed for 5 seconds or more to activate DTB Service menu.
The Home Media Gallery (HMG) Service menu is indicated below:
Top page of DTB Service menu Home Media Gallery Service menu
Content data
Ethernet connection data

F
USB device data
PDP-5020FD 67
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[8] AUDIO SYSTEM
Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Audio System
=> AU1
Has the sound been emitted from No Yes

Is sound muting set? Cancel muting, then check again.
the speakers?
Yes No
Yes
Is the volume set to 0? Raise the volume, then check again.
B No
No Pull out headphone, then check
Is not headphone inserted?
again.
Yes
Sound of all functions does not No
output?
Go to A.
Yes
Check the speakers and speaker No Replace the speakers or speaker
cables. Is it no problem? cables.
Yes
Is not a signal output from speaker No Replace the speakers or speaker

C terminals? cables.
36 37
Yes
Is a voltage (+17 V) supplied to No Check the cables (CN7502) from the main power and peripheral circuit.
IC8401? Repair the failure points.
Yes
Is not a PWM signal output from

IC8401? No Check between the LPF (L8451, L8452) and speaker terminals.
(pins 34, 38, 46, 50) Repair the failure points.
38 39
Yes
Is not a PWM signal output from

IC8201? No Check around the IC8201.
D (pins 52, 53, 54, 55) Repair the failure points.
40 41
Yes
Is a signal input to IC8201? No Check between the input terminals and IC8201.
(pins 24, 25) Repair the failure points.
42
Yes
Has I2C communication signal No Check the peripheral circuits and the communication with the
arrived at IC8201? microcomputer and clock output of X8201.
If there was no ploblem replace the MAP5601M.
Has the sound been emitted from No Is a 12 V output from +12V_Reg Check the IC7961 and peripheral circuit.
E the Audio out terminal? output of IC7961 normal? Repair the failure points.
Yes Yes
Are signals input to IC8331? Check the peripheral circuits and the communication with the
(pins 2, 3, 5, 6) microcomputer.
If there was no ploblem replace the MAP5601M.
43 44
Yes
Are signals output from IC8331? Check the IC8331 and peripheral circuit.
(pins 1, 7) Repair the failure points.
45
68 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Has the sound been emitted from No Yes

Is sound muting set? Cancel muting, then check again.
the Headphones?
No
Yes
Is the volume set to 0? Raise the volume, then check again.
No
Is a signal output from IC8201?

No
(pins 38, 39) Check around the IC8201 and repair the failure points.
B
46
Yes
Is a signal output from IC8371? No Check the communications around the IC8371 and between the IC8371
(pins 1, 7) and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem, replace BH3544F.
47
Yes
Check the cables between CN7505

NG
and CN8601 or check around the Replace the cables or SIDE IO Assy.
Headphones jack.
Waveforms
Input signal: L/R 1 kHz, 0.5 Vrms (VOL 30)
36 JA8551 - pins 1, 2 37 JA8551 - pins 3, 4 38 IC8401 - pins 34, 38 39 IC8401 - pins 46, 50 40 IC8201 - pins 52, 53
V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div V: 10 V/div H: 5 μS/div V: 10 V/div H: 5 μS/div V: 2 V/div H: 5 μS/div
41 IC8201 - pins 54, 55 42 IC8201 - pins 24, 25 43 IC8331 - pins 2, 3 44 IC8331 - pins 5, 6 45 IC8331 - pin 17
V: 2 V/div H: 5 μS/div V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div V: 2 V/div H: 1 mS/div
E
46 IC8201 - pins 38, 39 47 IC8271 - pins 1, 7
V: 1 V/div H: 1 mS/div V: 1 V/div H: 1 mS/div
PDP-5020FD 69
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
A
Has the sound of the Analog No Is a signal input to IC8201? No Check the communications between NG Replace the U5301 and
(pins 28, 29) the U5301 and the microcomputer
broadcasting output? repair the failure points.
and between the U5301 and IC8201.
Yes Yes
Check the communications around the IC8201 and between the IC8201
and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem, replace MAP5601M.
Has the sound of the HDMI No Is a SPDIF signal output from No

Replace the IC4901.
output? IC4901? (pin 78)
48
B Yes Yes
Is a SPDIF signal input to No Poor contact of the connector or FFC, or cable is defective.
IC8201? (pin 4) Replace FFC or cable.
48
Yes
Check that the HDMI switch of the NG Check the communications around the IC8201 and between the IC8201
MENU is properly set. and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem, replace MAP5601M.
Check the FFC and cables between

Poor contact of the connector or
Has the sound of the Digital No the MAIN Assy and IO_AUDIO Assy. Yes
FFC, or cable is defective.
broadcasting output? Does not sound output even if replace
Replace FFC or cable.
them?
Yes
C
No
Is a I2S signal input to IC8201? No Is a signal output from IC6001 of No
(pins 100 to 102) Repare the DTB block.
the MAIN Assy?
49 50 51
Yes Yes
Check the communications around the Check around IC6001 and repair
IC8201 and between the IC8201 and the failure points.
the microcomputer. If there was no
ploblem replace the MAIN Assy.
Has the sound of the Analog RCA No Is a signal input to IC8201? No Check between input terminal and
and PC inputs output? (pins 24 to 27, 32 to 37) IC8201 and repair the failure points.
D 43 44
Yes Yes
and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace the MAIN Assy.
Check the cables between CN8601

Has the sound of the side input No NG
and CN7505, and check around Replace the cables.
output? the pin jack.
OK
Is a signal input to IC8201? No Check between IC8201 and

(pins 30, 31) CN7505 and repair the failure points.
43 44
Yes
E
and the microcomputer. If there was no ploblem replace the MAIN Assy.
Waveforms
Input signal: L/R 1 kHz, 0.5 Vrms (VOL 30)
48 IC4901 - pin 78, IC8201 - pin 4 49 IC8201 - pin 100 50 IC8201 - pin 101 51 IC8201 - pin 102
V: 1 V/div H: 1 μS/div V: 1 V/div H: 10 μS/div V: 1 V/div H: 10 μS/div V: 1 V/div H: 10 μS/div
70 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
PDP-5020FD 71
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN)
A
[1] BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER-DOWN SIGNAL
B
ADDRESS ASSY
(x8)
D13
Output to
signal PD detecdtion AD1
D20
X DRIVE
Under voltage
C 15VDD
detection ASSY
VXKOFS1
Under voltage OR
detection
VXKOFS2 Under voltage

detection
Resonance center Over or under X1 D22
electric potential voltage detection
SCAN connector
D
disconnection Y DRIVE
detection (upper) DCDC Convertor ASSY
OR Stop
SCAN connector
disconnection
detection (lower)
Over or under
SCAN ASSY IC5V
voltage detection
VH
Over or under
voltage detection
Y1 D21
E VNOFS Under voltage
detection
VKOFS1_2
15VDD Under voltage OR
VKOFS3 detection
VKOFS4 VPRST Under voltage

detection
Resonance center Over or under
electric potential voltage detection
72 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Note:
The figures 2 to c indicate the number of
times the Red LED flashes when power-down
occurs in the corresponding route.
DIGITAL ASSY POWER SUPPLY

UNIT
OR
ADRS_PD ADR_PD_MSK
SQ_LSI
Gen.
C
ADR_PD
12 DIGI_DCDC_PD DCDC
8 Convertor
XDD_PD 10
DRF_SW
XSUS_PD 11
DRF_SW
PD MUTE EXT_PD D
circuit
D23 P4 Relay
Control
PD_MUTE_B
OR
SCN5V_PD 4
SCAN_PD 3 Protection
YDD_PD 6 Circuit
YSUS_PD E
7
PS_PD 2
MODULE Microcomputer PD_TRG_B
PDP-5020FD 73
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2] PD (POWER-DOWN) DIAGNOSIS OF FAILURE ANALYSIS
Red LED Factory
Flashing History Defective
Assy PD Outline Checkpoint
Count Display
POWER SUPPLY Each PD in the POWER SUPPLY Unit
Unit Connector disconnection Connector [P14][P15] (60”only)
2 P-PWR
X DRIVE Assy VSUS under voltage protection X SUS block
Y DRIVE Assy VSUS under voltage protection Y SUS block
ADDRESS Assy Connector disconnection Connector [AD1]
DIGITAL Assy Connector disconnection Connector [D13] to [D20]
SCAN Assy SCAN IC
B
X DRIVE Assy X SUS block
3 SCAN VH over or under voltage protection Y SUS block
VH DC/DC
Y DRIVE Assy
OFFSET block
Connector disconnection Connector [Y1][Y2]
DIGITAL Assy Connector disconnection Connector [D21]
SCAN Assy Connector [SA1][SB1][SB2][SC1][SC2]
Connector disconnection
4 SCN5V [SD1]
SCAN IC
IC5V over or under voltage protection
Y DRIVE Assy IC5V DC/DC
Y MSK block
VNOFS under voltage protection NOFS block
C VNOFS DC/DC
VPRST regulaotr
VYPRST under voltage protection
PR-U block
15V DC/DC
15VDD under voltage protection
SOFT-G block
6 Y-DCDC Y DRIVE Assy Y MSK block
VKOFS1,2 under voltage protection KNOFS2 block
VYKOFS1, 2 regulaotr
Y MSK block
VKOFS3 under voltage protection
VYKOFS3 regulaotr
Y MSK block
VKOFS4 under voltage protection KNOFS4 block
VYKOFS4 regulaotr
D
Y DRIVE Assy Over or under voltage protection of the Y resonance block
7 Y-SUS center electric potential
DIGITAL Assy SQ_LSI does not operate SEQ_LSI (Sync input, output waveform)
Address resonance block
VADR under voltage protection
ADDRESS Assy TCP
Connector disconnection Connector [AD1][AD2]
8 ADRS DIGITAL Assy Connector disconnection Connector [D13] to [D20]
Y DRIVE Assy Connector disconnection Connector [Y2][Y5][Y6]
X DRIVE Assy Connector disconnection Connector [X2][X3][X4]
POWER SUPPLY
Connector disconnection Connector [P1][P2]
Unit
Connector disconnection Connector [X2]
E 15VDD under voltage protection X SUS block
15V DC/DC
10 X-DCDC X DRIVE Assy VXKOFS1 under voltage protection VXKOFS1 regulaotr
X OFFSET block
VXKOFS2 under voltage protection VXKOFS2 regulaotr
X OFFSET block
11 X-SUS X DRIVE Assy Over or under voltage protection of the
center electric potential X resonance block
3.3V,2.5V,1.1V DC/DC controlo IC
12 D-DCDC DIGITAL Assy Over voltage/under voltage/overcurrent
DC/DC block
protection
POWER SUPPLY
Unit Connector disconnection Connector [P4]
F 15 UNKNOW Connector disconnection Connector [D23]
DIGITAL Assy
ModuleUcom can not detection Each PD line of ModuleUcom
74 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Possible Defective Part Remarks
The POWER SUPPLY Unit of 60 inches model is a structure of the two parts.
Q1218,Q1219,Q1221-Q1223,Q1226 VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT-SUSGND are short-circuited.
Q2217-Q2224 VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT-SUSGND are short-circuited.
each SCAN IC The abnormality of the SCAN IC

B
Q1218,Q1219,Q1221-Q1223,Q1226 VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT-SUSGND are short-circuited.
Q2217-Q2219,Q2221-Q2223 VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT-SUSGND are short-circuited.
IC2601,IC2603,IC2604
Q2401,Q2402 KNOFS1 and KNOFS3 are short-circuited.
[SB2][SC1][SC2][SD1] are 60 inches model only.
each SCAN IC
Q2764,D2768,R2764
Q2321-Q2326,Q2328-Q2331,Q2333,Q2334 L MSK is short-circuited.
Q2424,Q2429 NOFS is short-circuited.
D2606,Q2709-Q2711 C
Q2604,Q2605,IC2602
Q2418 PR-U is short-circuited.
Q2662,R2669,L2301,R2335
Q2427 SOFT-G is short-circuited.
Q2430 KNOFS2 is short-circuited.
Q2702,Q2705,R2714
Q2703,Q2706,R2715
Q2432 KNOFS4 is short-circuited.
Q2704,Q2707,R2717
D
Q2106-Q2109,Q2111,Q2113,D2104-D2107
IC3301,IC3302 The history of SD1 remains

Q1711,Q1721,Q1731,Q1741,Q1911,Q1921,Q1931,D1711,D1721,D1731,D1741,D1911,D1921,D1931
TCP (IC1651,IC1661,IC1671,IC1681,IC1851,IC1861,IC1871) When the TCP is damaged, replace the panel.
Ref No. of L Assy (6 pieces) and S Assy (2 pieces) are common use.
L1201,R1217 E
Q1402
Q1405,Q1406
Q1302,Q1304
Q1403,Q1404
Q1301,Q1303
Q1108,Q1112,Q1116,Q1119
IC3801
Q3841,Q3861,Q3881,L3841,L3861,L3881
R3820,R3848,R3868,R3888
EXT_PD line : Open
F
EXT_PD line : Open
It becomes "UNKNOW" except above-mentioned
PD detection condition.
PDP-5020FD 75
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN)
A
[1] BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE SHUTDOWN SIGNAL
MAIN ASSY
IC7003
IC4901 IC4702 IC7004 EMMA2_UCOM
HDMI_RX VDEC EEPROM
15
B SCL_MB 8 8
SDA_MB 2 =>1 SCL_MA
SW SDA_MA
RXD_ARIA
12 IC6001 12 TXD_ARIA
BCM7404 TXD_DT
IC5501 RXD_DT
MN884350
12 8
C
U5301 IC4801
AD-FE ADC
IC5301
MPX
8
IO ASSY SCL_AV5
SDA_AV5
IC8101
RGB SW
IC8001 8 5V ⇔ 3.3V SCL_AV TXD_MD
AV SW Converter SDA_AV RXD_MD
I03 M12
D
IC8201
8
MSP
5
IC8401 A_NG_B
D-Amp
5 TXD_IF
OTW ANT_POW_DE 7 9 RXD_IF
CLK_IF
IC6811 BUSY_IF RST2
IF_UCOM CE_IF
E
REQ_IF
I04 M13
11
TH7891
TEMP2 RST4
Temp. sensor
M5 10
External FAN NG2
F FAN
76 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Note : The figures 1 to f indicate the number of times the Blue

LED flashes when shut-down occurs in the corresponding
route.
X DRIVE
DIGITAL ASSY ASSY
IC3601 R1019
Identification
MODULE_UCOM resistor
(MDU)
X1 B
7 1
IC6501 IC3301 D22
MULTI_LSI SQ_LSI
TXD_SQ 1
RXD_SQ PSIZE
CLK_SQ
STOP_SQ
CE_SQ 1
BUSY_SQ
PLANT
RST_SQ
R3628
IC3607
1 Identification
resistor
MONO SQ_NON C
V+6_5V
MULTI
FU3801
5A_FUSE
IC3801
DDC
6 M12 D11 3
RXD_MD IC3805
TXD_MD RST2 3.3V_RST_IC
DAC_DIN 2 D
DAC_DOUT IC3605
DAC_CLK DAC
4
TEMP1
E_SCL IC3602
V+3_4V_ACT2 V+3_3V_D3 E_SDA DIG
EEPROM
13 1
IC7002
AND-Gate
2
V+3_4V_D E
D24
13
IC7002
AND-Gate BUS
SE1
I2C
V+12V V+6_5V V+5_1V
IC3901
IC3902 UART
BACKUP
SENSOR
EEPROM F
3-wire serial
PANEL SENSOR ASSY
Status notice line
PDP-5020FD 77
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2] SD (SHUTDOWN) DIAGNOSIS
Frequency of Log Indication in Factory Mode
Major Type Detailed Type
LED Flashing (*1) MAIN SUB
Blue 1 Orange 1 Abnormality in the Sequence LSI Communication error SQ-LSI RTRY
Orange 2 Drive stop SQNO
Orange 3 Busy BUSY

Orange 4 Version mismatching VER-HS
(hardware, software)
B Orange 5 Version mismatching VER-HM

(hardware, backup memory)
Orange 6 Version mismatching VER-HI

(hardware, DIGITAL memory)
Blue 2 Orange 1 Failure in MDU device Digital EEPROM MD-DEV EEPROM

Orange 2 communication Backup EEPROM BACKUP
Orange 3 DAC IC DAC
Blue 3 – Abnormality in RST2 power – RST2 –
decrease
C
Blue 4 Orange 1 Abnormality in panel temperature Abnormality in high temperature TMP-NG TMP-H
Orange 2 Abnormality in low temperature TMP-L
Blue 5 Short-circuiting of the speakers – AUDIO AUDIO

Orange 1 Overcurrent detection
D-AMP temperature abnormality
Orange 2 OTW
Blue 6 – Failure in communication with the – MODULE –
module microcomputer
D Blue 7 – Failure in IF microcomputer IF microcomputer MA-3L IF
Orange 2 3-wire serial communication MULTI MULTI
Blue 8 Orange 1 Failure in IIC communication with Tuner 1 MA-IIC FE1
Orange 2 the main microcomputer MSP/MAP MSPMAP
Orange 3 AV switch AV-SW
Orange 4 RGB switch RGB-SW
Orange 5 Main VDEC VDEC
Orange 6 VDEC SDRAM SDRAM
Orange 7 AD/PLL ADC
Orange 8 HDMI HDMI
Orange 11 US-MSP US-MSP
Blue 9 – Failure in communication with the main microcomputer – MAIN –
Blue 10 Abnormality in FAN FAN2 FAN FAN2
E Orange 2
Blue 11 High temperature of the unit – TEMP2 –

–
Blue 12 Orange 1 Digital Tuner DTV startup error DTUNER PS/RST

Orange 2 DTV communication error RETRY
Orange 3 DEVICE ERR DEVICE
Orange 7 Tuner 1 DE-FE
Orange 18 Application DTVAPP
Orange 19 DEMOD DEMOD
Blue 13 Orange 1 Failure in the power supply DC-DC Converter power decrease RST-MA M-DCDC
F POWER SUPPLY RELAY
Orange 2
Blue 15 – Main EEPROM Main EEPROM communication error MA-EEP –
78 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
*1: If the DISPLAY key is pressed during shutdown (the blue LED is flashing), flashing of the orange LED, which indicates the subcategory, can be confirmed.
The blue LED remains flashing. Pressing the DISPLAY key again will make the orange LED go dark.
Possible Defective
Checkpoint Part Remarks
Communication line between MDU and SQ_LSI IC3601/IC3301 SQ_IC communication not established. IC3301 may not have properly started up.
Drive detectig signal of MDU (SQ_NON) CN3201/IC3601/ A shutdown occurs if the drive waveform periodically does not output.
IC3301/IC3607 (When SQ_NON of MDU input is High, a shutdown is generated.)
Communication line between MDU and SQ_LSI (BUSY_SQ) IC3601/IC3301 If BUSY_SQ remains high, a shutdown is generated.
Check the DIGITAL Assy and the software version of IC3601/IC3301 When the identification resistor of PSIZE/PLANT and software version of SEQ
SEQ and the destination of the panel. are incoherent, a shutdown occurs.
Check the connection between [X1] and [D22].
Check the DIGITAL Assy and the software version of IC3601/ When the identification resistor of PSIZE/PLANT and stored content of B
SEQ and the destination of the panel. Check the SENSOR Assy(IC3902) EEPROM on the SENSOR Assy are incoherent, a shutdown occurs.
connections between [X1] and [D22], and [SE1] and [D24].
Communication line between MDU and BACKUP EEPROM
Check the DIGITAL Assy and the software version of IC3601/IC3602 When the identification resistor of PSIZE/PLANT and stored content of
SEQ and the destination of the panel. Check the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy are incoherent, a shutdown occurs.
connections between [X1] and [D22].
Communication line between MDU and DIG EEPROM
Communication line between MDU and DIG EEPROM IC3601/IC3602
Communication line between MDU and BACKUP EEPROM IC3601/SENSOR Assy(IC3902)
Communication line between MDU and DAC IC3601/IC3605
3.3 V output (TP3881) of DDC IC3801/IC3805 If RST2 does not become high after the unit is turned on, a shutdown will be
generated in several seconds.
V+6.5V of POWER SUPPLY Unit (Check [D25][P4]) POWER SUPPLY Unit, Check if V + 6_5 V is started. Also check if the FU3801 on the DIGITAL Assy C
FU3801 has melted. FU3801 has been melted.
Installation environment SENSOR Assy If TEMP1 that is read by the module microcomputer is 85 °C or higher, a
(IC3901) shutdown will be generated.
Installation environment SENSOR Assy A shutdown occurs if the reading of TEMP1 detected by the module micro-
Check the connection between SE1 and D24. (IC3901) computer is –20 °C or less. Also check the connection between SE1 and D24.
Speaker terminals JA8551 Check if any speaker cable is in contact with the chassis.
D_AMP IC8401 Check if the AMP output is short-circuited.
Periphery of the cable between IO3 and M12, and CN7503,CN7504, Check if cables are firmly connected.
IO4 and M13 CN4003,CN4004
D_AMP IC8401 Check the temperature that is 125 °C or less.
Communication line between MAIN and MOD IC7003 Check the communication lines (TXD_MOD/RXD_MOD).
Periphery of the cable between D11 and M12 CN4101,CN4105 Check if cables are firmly connected.
Communication line between IF and MAIN IC7003,IC6501 Check the communication lines (TXD_IF/RXD_IF/CLK_IF/BUSY_IF/CE_IF/REQ_IF). D
Communication line between MULTI and MAIN IC7003,IC6501 Check the communication lines (TXD_ARIA/RXD_ARIA).
IIC communication line between Tuner and MAIN U5301,IC7003 Check the communication lines (SCL_TU/SDA_TU or SCL_AV/SDA_AV).
IIC communication line between MSP/MAP and MAIN IC8201,IC7003 Check the communication lines (SCL_AV/SDA_AV).
IIC communication line between AV-SW and MAIN IC8001,IC7003 Check the communication lines (SCL_AV5/SDA_AV5).
IIC communication line between RGB_SW and MAIN IC8101,IC7003 Check the communication lines (SCL_AV5/SDA_AV5).
IIC communication line between M_VDEC and MAIN IC4702,IC7003 Check the communication lines (SCL_MB/SDA_MB).
IIC communication line between VDEC and SDRAM IC4702,IC4802 Check the communication lines (SDRAM). Defective SDRAM
IIC communication line between ADC and MAIN IC4801,IC7003 Check the communication lines (SCL_AV/SDA_AV).
IIC communication line between HDMI_RX and MAIN IC4901,IC7003 Check the communication lines (SCL_MB/SDA_MB).
IIC communication line between US_MSP and MAIN IC5301,IC7003 Check the communication lines (SCL_AV/SDA_AV).
Communication line between IF and MAIN IC6811,IC7003 Check the communication lines (TXD_IF/RXD_IF/CLK_IF/BUSY_IF/CE_IF/REQ_IF).
Dirt attached to the fan motor Check the fan. (SD10 does not detect it at the temperature that fans do not turn.)
Periphery of the FAN CONNECT Assy FAN NG E
Periphery of the cable between FA1 and FA3 Check if cables are firmly connected.
Periphery of the fan control regulator IC4303 Check that the voltage outputs it.
Ambient temperature TEMP2 A shutdown occurs because of high temperature.
Temperature sensor or its periphery TH7891 TEMP2
Periphery of the cable between IO4 and M13 CN7504,CN4004 Check if cables are firmly connected.
Startup of BCM7404 IC6001 Check the startup of the BCM7404 and the communication line with MAIN.
Communication line between BCM7404 and MAIN IC6001 Check the startup of the BCM7404 and the communication line with MAIN.
Periphery of BCM7404 IC6001
Front-end block IC6001,U5301 Check the BCM7404 and its periphery device.
DTV application IC6001
DEMOD IC6001,IC5501 Check the communication line between BCM7404 and DEMOD.
RST2 V+3_4V_ACT2, V+3_3V_D3 IC7002 Check if each voltages are started.
RST4 V+12V, V+6_5V, V+5_1V, V+3_4V_D IC7002 Check if each voltages are started. F
RST4 V+12V, V+6_5V, V+5_1V, V+3_4V_D POWER SUPPLY Unit Check if each voltages are started.
Check the cables M2 and M3. CN4207, CN4210 Check if cables are firmly connected.
IIC communication line between EEPROM and MAIN IC7004, IC7003 Check the communcation lines (SCL_EP/SDA_EP)
PDP-5020FD 79
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
5.5 NON-FAILURE INFORMATION
A
[1] INFORMATION ON SYMPTOMS THAT DO NOT CONSTITUTE FAILURE
Symptom Cause, item to check, information

HDMI: Symptoms concerning the input format and settings
The color setting for INPUT 4 to 7 is not compatible with that of the output equipment.
The picture color for an INPUT 4 to 7 signal is not correct.
Check whether the color setting is YPbPr or RGB.
The video signal to INPUT 4 to 7 is not displayed, and a A unsupported video signal is input.
message is displayed.
The audio setting for INPUT 4 to 5 is any setting and a video signal is not input. If the audio
The audio signal input to the INPUT 4 to 5 is not output. setting is any setting to output an analog audio signal, the HDMI signal must be input. (If a DVI
B No HDMI signal is input. device is to be connected, use a DVI-HDMI conversion cable.) If the HDMI video signal is not
input, the analog audio signal is not output.
The setting on the side of the HDMI output equipment is wrong.

No sound of signals to INPUT 4 to 7 is output.
Example: Dolby Digital
Check that the connected cable supports HDMI Category 2. (As the clock frequency for the 1080p
The 1080p input signal is not displayed properly or at all, signal is triple that for the 1080i signal, signal degradation caused by a cable must not be
although the 1080i input signal is displayed properly. neglected. A cable supporting HDMI Category 2 can be used for the 1080p signal. Although some
conventional cables can support the 1080p signal, some others cannot.)
DIGITAL OUT
Playback of the signal from the DIGITAL audio output
The video signal output from the DIGITAL connector is copy-protected.
connector is possible, but recording is not possible.
C Miscellaneous
The no-signal off function is not activated. The no-signal off and no-operation off functions are effective only if video (composite, S video,
The no-operation off function is not activated. component, HDMI [excluding PC]) input or TV input is selected.
Power Management is effective only while an analog PC signal is being input. It is not effective
Power management does not function.
with HDMI-PC signal input.
The Auto Setup function is effective only while an analog PC signal is being input. This function
The AUTO SETUP function is not activated.
does not work if an analog PC signal is not input, even if the INPUT PC is selected.
Control via the SR connector is not possible. Wrong connection of the cable to the PC INPUT (AUDIO) connector is suspected.
The audio signal from the PC is not output. Wrong connection of the cable to the SR connector is suspected.
The picture-quality setting is stored for each input. As the setting is changed when another input
The picture-quality setting (AV Selection) is not stored.
is selected, the user may have a false idea that the setting is not stored.
D The picture size changes arbitrary. The Auto Size setting is set to ON.
The orbiter function for minimizing the effects of phosphor burn is activated. Although the setting
The display position of the screen changes slightly while the
for this function can be changed on the Home menu, retaining the factory setting is strongly
screen is on.
recommended.
The component video cable is connected to the same input function as for the S video (even if no
The video signal to the S video connector is not displayed. signal is input to the component video connector, merely having something plugged in to the
connector will result in judgment that a signal is being fed in and the component video connector
takes priority). (Priority of connectors: component video > S video > composite video)
The video signal to the composite video connector is not The S Video or component video cable is connected to the same input function as for the
displayed. composite video. (Priority of connectors: component video > S video > composite video)
SUPPLEMENT: On the video setting for HDMI

E
There are three types of HDMI output formats: color difference 4:4:4, color difference 4:2:2, and RGB4:4:4.
(The proportions, such as 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, represent those of the amount of data for video signal components. For example, as for color difference 4:4:4, the
proportion of the amount of data as for Y, Cb, and Cr is 4:4:4.)
It is required to make the settings of the PDP according to the settings of the output equipment. For usual operation, however, set them to AUTO. If the color is
inappropriate, make the settings manually.
In the HDMI system, video signals are coded at 24 bits per pixel and transmitted as a series of 24-bit pixels. In a case of color difference 4:4:4, Y, Cb, and Cr use 8
bits each. In a case of color difference 4:2:2, Y, Cb, and Cr use 12 bits each, but Cb and Cr are transmitted at a half sampling rate of Y. This unit is capable of
processing the upper 10 bits out of 12 bits of video data. Recent high-end DVD players, such as Pioneer DV-79AVi, are capable of outputting 10-bit color-difference
signals. In general, it is said that picture quality for color difference 4:2:2 format is assumed to be higher, because human eyes are more sensitive to luminance
than to colors. In the case of RGB4:4:4, R, G, and B use 8 bits each.
80 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[2] FUNCTION OF DECREASING THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
If the panel temperature becomes high or a video signal that requires activation of panel protection is input, the unit will
protect the panel by decreasing the brightness level.
* While a mask is being displayed, the panel protection function will not be activated.
Protection Function
Purpose Conditions Protection Function Remarks
Name
High-temperature For protection of Panel temperature (TEMP1) Offsetting the ABL
protection function 1 parts (DCF) reaches 65 ºC. adjustment value
High-temperature For reducing Panel temperature (TEMP1) Limiting for the maximum
protection function 2 heating in the unit reaches 80 ºC. number of SUS pulses
Panel protection For preventing A still image is displayed for Limiting for the maximum The picture will be considered to be still B
function 1 burn-in 3 minutes or more. number of SUS pulses if only the mouse cursor is moved.
Panel protection For protection of An image with which a particular Limiting for the maximum
function 2 SCAN ICs load is applied to one SCAN IC number of SUS pulses
is displayed. (See Fig. 2)
Panel protection For protection An image with which the heat of Limiting for the maximum
function 3 against panel part in the panel is increased is number of SUS pulses
cracking displayed. (See Fig. 3)
Limiting for the maximum number of SUS pulses

By gradually decreasing the limit for the maximum number of SUS pulses, the temperature of the panel will be lowered.
• The limit for the maximum number of SUS pulses will be decreased by 8 per 5 seconds.
• The lower limit for the maximum number of SUS pulses is about 700.
C
• The maximum number of SUS pulses will begin to increase gradually if the conditions that led to activation of the
protection function return to normal.
ABL adjustment value offset

By gradually offsetting the ABL adjustment value, the temperature of the
panel will be lowered. The number of SUS pulses, which is determined
based on the input APL (average picture level), will be decreased.
• The ABL adjustment value will be offset by one step per 30 seconds.
• The ABL adjustment value will be gradually restored if conditions that
let to activation of the protection function return to normal.
Fig. 2: Detection example: SCAN IC protection
Limiting for the maximum number

of SUS pulses
2000
700
Number of SUS pulses
Fig. 3: Detection example: Protection against panel cracking
Offsetting of the ABL adjustment value

The number of SUS pulses with regard
to the input APL will be decreased.
Input APL F
Fig. 1: Relationship between input APL and number of SUS pulses
PDP-5020FD 81
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
5.6 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATION
[1] PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON/OFF FUNCTION

Function:
It is an operational mode where the digital signal processing performs circuit operation but the power is not supplied to the
panel driving system (Vsus, VAddress) in order to avoid a power down (PD).
Application:
1. When it is necessary to check whether the signal output is correctly reaching the drive system in a repairing activity etc.
2. In the case of a PD, to determine whether the problem is with the panel drive-power supply or with the other system power
supply.
B
Method:
1. Short-circuit between the specified location of the POWER SUPPLY Unit and GND (Multi base section recommended),
using a jumper with alligator clips (refer to the photos below).
2. Execute [DRV S00] by RS-232C command. ([DRV S01] for release)
Supplemental explanation:
• When the panel drive-power is in OFF state, there will be no PD, except PS_PD, as the PD signal has been muted.
• If the clip is removed in the OFF state of the panel drive-power, PD will take place at the instance of clip removal.
Therefore, be sure to remove the clip after turning the power OFF.
• Under RS-232C command control, [DRV S01] (release) is possible during power ON. However, there is a possibility of
damaging the set. Therefore, make this operation only after turning the power OFF.
C • Command [DRV S00/S01] is effective even during standby.
• Setting with RS-232C commands or the remote control unit is enabled during Standby mode. However, if the unit is left
unoperated for about 10 seconds in Standby mode after setting with RS-232C commands or the remote control unit is
completed, the setting will become void.
• When the main power switch is set to OFF, no command is accepted.
• Setting with RS-232C commands or the remote control unit will become void if the AC power cord is unplugged, the main
power switch is set to OFF, or the unit is left unoperated for about 10 seconds in Standby mode.
When the panel drive-power is ON When the panel drive-power is OFF
POWER SUPPLY Unit POWER SUPPLY Unit

D
DRF-SW-B
(TEST PIN) DRF-SW-B
(TEST PIN)
Alligator clip
Multi base GND Multi base
82 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[2] SPECIFICATION OF THE FAN CONTROL
Block diagram
The external fans cool down the whole unit.
External fans
DIGITAL Assy IO Assy
TEMP2
Module_Ucom
FAN
If an emergency signal
OR CONNECT
is detected, it will be
transmitted.
Assy
Main_Ucom R
The Main micro-

Detection of
computer controls disconnection
the IF microcomputer FAN_VCC2
as a port expander.
FAN_2_
REG 0 to 12V
TEMP2 C
IF_Ucom
FAN_NG2
FAN_ON2
VOLTAGE
FAN_CONT2
CONTROL
MAIN Assy
D
Operation specifications
DAC output
External FAN
DAC2
Temperature SD
DAC1
STOP
0xFF 39.0 ºC 41.0 ºC 47.0 ºC 50.0 ºC 62.0 ºC E
Notes:
• The operating temperature of the fan is higher than the ambient temperature, because the sensor temperature is read by
the microcomputer.
• If the critical values for signals are displayed in the address circuit, the fan may be activated or be rotated at higher speed
in response to values lower than the set temperature values shown above.
• When the temperature rises, the sensor voltage of TEMP2 decreases.
• When the voltage of the DAC output for external FAN decreases, rotation speed of FAN rises.
PDP-5020FD 83
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[3] PROCESSING IN ABNORMALITY
Speaker short-circuit
Circuit configuration
MAIN Assy
IO_AUDIO Assy
OTW OTW IF_UCOM
DIGITAL
POWER A_NG_B A_NG_B
AMP IC MAIN_UCOM
PULL_D PULL_D
B
Specifications for port monitoring

Port Name SD/PD Indication Active Monitoring conditions Operation
Shutdown occurs when the signal is "L." RST4 = "H" (always)
A_NG_B AUDIO The main CPU operations described below will be
30 mS ∗ 10 times (Monitoring starts 2 sec performed when either "A_NG_B = L" or "OTW = L" is
Shutdown occurs when the signal is "L." after the above conditions detected (established) under the monitoring conditions.
OTW AUDIO are established.)
120 mS ∗ 3 times
Operation specifications of the main CPU

(1) Establish the short-circuit of the speaker by the main CPU
C • After a warning indication is displayed for 5 sec, a shutdown is generated (the blue LED flashes 5 times).
• A warning indication is displayed for all input-signal types.
• Example of a warning indication: "The speaker terminals are short-circuited. After reconnection, turn the unit on again."
(2) Display conditions

When the panel is on: A warning indication is displayed immediately.
When the panel is off: A warning indication is not displayed immediately but is displayed when the panel is turned on.
Note: A warning indication is displayed each time the panel is turned on if the conditions for a shutdown persist.
Conditions for resetting the circuits

The circuits will be reset upon Standby ON/OFF.
84 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Power supply and DC-DC converter
POWER SUPPLY Unit V+3_4V_ACT MAIN Assy
MAIN_UCOM IF_UCOM
AC_DET RST3 AC shutdown
Inverter
detection
V+12V
SW_REG V+6.5V V+3_4V_D
PULL_U
RST4 Voltage
MAIN detection
POWER PULL_D AND
Startup
SW
Main ucom ACTIVE
B
V+6_5V V+5_1V
PULL_U PULL_U V+3_4V_D3

V+3_4V_ACT2
PULL_D PULL_D
RST2 Voltage
AND
detection
OR
RELAY1 PSW1 DC_DC Converter

DC/DC Converter
output control
RELAY2
MODULE_Ucom Command PON/POFF

Command
C
DIGITAL ASSY

Shutdown occurs when the • Panel screen ON Shutdown occurs immediately
RST2 ASIC power
signal is "L." (RST4 = H and PSW1 = H) Blue LED flashes 13 times
(M-DCDC)
for 5 sec after PSW1 is ON. • While awaiting restoration
or of RST2 (RST2 = L)
for 2 sec while the unit is
ON.
AC_OFF when the signal is Excepting passive standby If "RST3 = H" (AC_OFF) is detected under the
RST3 AC power
"H." monitoring conditions, a power-off process starts.
Monitoring of the RST3 port is continued, while D
monitoring of other ports is interrupted.
Communication is controlled only by the IF
microcomputer. The port outputs are set as specified.
If the signal at the RST3 port continues to be H after
30 mS of waiting, monitoring is continued.
If RST3 is L, a restoration process starts according to
the latest power-on/-off status.
Shutdown occurs if the RELAY2 = ON (High) Shutdown occurs immediately
RST4 MAIN power
signal is "L." Blue LED flashes 13 times
(RELAY)
for 5 sec after RELAY2 is
ON.
or
for 2 sec while the unit is
ON or in Functional STB.
E
PDP-5020FD 85
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
Fan and temperature sensor
IO Assy MAIN Assy V+3_3V_UCOM
PULL_U
TEMP2 TEMP2
SENSOR
IF_UCOM
B FAN FAN CONNECT

Assy
FAN ON2
FAN_VCC1/FA_VCC2 Drive
FAN FAN CONT2
Circuit
DAC
FAN_NG2 (H act)
OR
FAN
FAN PANEL SENSOR DIGITAL Assy

Assy
TEMP1 MODULE_
SENSOR UCOM MAIN_UCOM
C PULL_D

Shutdown occurs when RST2 = H and FAN_ON2 = H Shutdown occurs immediately
FAN_NG2 FAN
the signal is "H." (Monitoring starts 3 sec after the Blue LED flashes 10 times
1 S ∗ 3 times above conditions are established.)
Shutdown occurs if any RST4 = H In the Panel screen ON: Shutdown occurs after the
TEMP2 High temperature at
D values equal to or (Monitoring starts 1 sec after the warning indication is displayed for 30 sec.
MTB greater than minimum to above conditions are established.) In the Functional STB: Shutdown occurs immediately
require a shutdown are Blue LED flashes 11 times
detected.
1 S ∗ 3 times
TEMP1 Panel temperature is Shutdown occurs if any Digital video RST2 = H Shutdown occurs after waiting for 30 sec.
high values equal to or Blue LED flashes 4 times
greater than minimum to
require a shutdown are
Panel temperature is detected. Shutdown occurs after waiting for 3 sec.
low 200 mS ∗ 5 times Blue LED flashes 4 times
(average)
86 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
5.7 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND
A
[1] PREPARED TOOLS
It is necessary to prepare the following one to use 232C command.
• PC
• Application for control
• 232C cable (straight)
∗ The setting of the Com port cannot be communicated if it doesn't do correctly.
(Please follow a set explanation of PC in the Com port)
[2] USING RS-232C COMMANDS

Individual ports are provided for RS-232C and SR+ connectors with this model. Therefore, unlike the case of previous models,
which required switching of exclusive operation between these connectors on the Integrator menu, switching is no longer
required.
PDP-5020FD 87
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
5.8 LIST OF RS-232C COMMANDS
A RS-232C commands can be used in Service Factory mode. Before using RS-232C commands, it is necessary to change the factory presetting.
See "5.7 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND".
[Note ; If you want to see version infomation (ex. QS1, QSE, Factory, Menu), Please see 10 seconds after starting.]
RS-232C command list

Active Effective only
Command U-com Last
Function in Factory Remarks
Name Memory
MDU MTB mode
A
ABL ∗∗∗ Adjusting the upper limit of the power % MOD %
AMT S00 Audio mute OFF %
B S01 Audio mute ON %
AP0 S∗∗ ADDRESS L1, L2 setting % MOD % Note 1
AP1 S∗∗ ADDRESS L3, L4 setting % MOD % Note 1
AP2 S∗∗ ADDRESS U1, U2 setting % MOD % Note 1
AP3 S∗∗ ADDRESS U3, U4 setting % MOD % Note 1
APN ∗∗∗ 1V average pulse number setting % MOD %
B
BCP Copying the backup data in the EEPROM % MOD %
BSM S00 After image/Burning safe mode: OFF %
S01 After image/Burning safe mode: ON %
C C
CHN FWD Changing tuner preset channel (1 step forward) %
REV Changing tuner preset channel (1 step reverse) %
CBU Clearing backup data of EEPROM % MOD %
CHM Clearing data of the hour meter % % MOD %
Clear the hour meter of
CHR Clearing data of the hour meter of MTB/MR side % screen display of MAIN NG
CMT Clearing data of the maximum temperature % MOD %
CNG Clearing shutdown history of MTB/MR side %
CPC Clearing power-on count data % MOD %
CPD Clearing power-down histrory % MOD %

CPM Clearing data of the pulse meter % MOD %
D %
CSD Clearing shutdown history of Panel side % MOD
CSF S00 Color sensor function OFF %
S01 Color sensor function ON %
CSM S01 Color space mode 1: Pioneer original %
S02 Color space mode 2: EBU standard conformity %
CSB ∗∗∗ Blue coefficient of color sensor % MOD %
CSG ∗∗∗ Green coefficient of color sensor % MOD %
CSR ∗∗∗ Red coefficient of color sensor % MOD %
CTP S00 Color temperature switch OFF %
S01 Color temperature switch LOW setting %
S02 Color temperature switch MID LOW setting %
E
S03 Color temperature switch MID setting %
S04 Color temperature switch MID HIGH setting %
S05 Color temperature switch HIGH setting %
D
DIZ S00 Dither/L dither OFF & noise OFF % %
S01 Dither/L dither ON & noise ON % %
S02 Dither/L dither OFF & noise ON % %
S03 Dither/L dither ON & noise OFF % %
DRV S00 Panel drive-power OFF %
S01 Panel drive-power ON %
To subtract ∗ to the adjustment value (∗ = 0 to 9, subtract 10 with DW0 and
F DW*
set to minimum value with DWF) %
Note 1: It is necessary to turn off the power for reflecting the setting change.
88 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Command Active Effective only
Last
Name Function U-com in Factory Remarks
MDU MTB
Memory
mode
F
Determining the flag of the DIGITAL Assy adjustment in "adjustment is
FAJ
completed" % MOD %
FAN Factory mode OFF % % %

FAY Factory mode ON % %
FBM S00 OFF (In-phase SUS drive prohibition) % MOD % Note 1
S01 MODE1 (In-phase SUS drive permission) % MOD % Note 1
FST S21 Set each memory setting of MTB/MR side to the shipment state. % %
B
I
INA ∗∗∗ Switching the terrestrial analog signal, direct tuning
% MAIN
(∗∗∗: channel number)
Switching the terrestrial analog signal % MAIN
INC ∗∗∗ Switching the terrestrial digital signal, direct tuning
% MAIN
(∗∗∗:channel number)
Switching the terrestrial digital signal % MAIN
INH ∗∗∗ Switching the Home Media Gallery %
INP S01 Input switch: INPUT 1 % MAIN
S02 Input switch: INPUT 2 % MAIN
S04 Input switch: INPUT 4 % MAIN C

S08 Input switch: INPUT 8 (PC) % MAIN
M
MIR S00 Mirror display mode: OFF %
S01 Mirror display mode: Right and left inversion %
S02 Mirror display mode: Top and bottom inversion %
S03 Mirror display mode: Top and bottom and right and left inversion %
MKC S00 MASK OFF % MOD D
S01 H ramp (slant 1) M % MOD %

S02 H ramp (slant 4) M % MOD %
S03 Slanting ramp M % MOD %
S04 30 for aging % MOD %
S05 05 for aging % MOD %
S06 Erasing afterimage 1 % MOD %
S07 Erasing afterimage 2 % MOD %
S08 White (change in luminance level) % MOD %
S09 PEAK detection raster % MOD %
% E
S10 Address lack check % MOD
S11 Green vertical line scroll % MOD %
S12 Green horizontal line scroll % MOD %
S13 Vertical ramp vertical scroll (white) % MOD %
S14 Vertical ramp vertical scroll (green) % MOD %
S15 Horizontal ramp horizontal scroll (white) % MOD %
S16 Horizontal ramp horizontal scroll (green) % MOD %
S17 Cross hatch + window % MOD %
MKS S00 MASK OFF % MOD
S01 H ramp (slant 1) % MOD %

S02 H ramp (slant 4) % MOD %
F
PDP-5020FD 89
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
Last
Memory
MDU MTB mode
M
MKS S03 V ramp (slant 1) % MOD %
S04 Slanting ramp % MOD %
S05 Window (Hi= 870, Lo= 102) % MOD %
S06 Window (Hi= 1023, Lo= 102) % MOD %
S07 Window (Hi= 1023, Lo=000) % MOD %
S08 Window (Hi= 1023) 4 % % MOD %
B S09 Window (Hi= 1023) 1.25 % % MOD %
S10 Window (1/7 LINE) % MOD %
S11 STRIPE (MGT/GRN) % MOD %
S12 STRIPE (GRN/MGT) % MOD %
S13 B & W, checker (1 line) % MOD %
S14 B & W, checker (2 lines) % MOD %
S17 COLOR BAR % MOD %
S18 Slanting lines % MOD %
C S19 Red & black, checker (1 line) % MOD %
S20 Red & black, checker (2 lines) % MOD %
S23 Erasing afterimage (RGB: zigzag, V: reverse) % MOD %
S24 Black raster (max SUS pulses) % MOD % Note 5
S25 1 for perfect linear % MOD %
D S29 RGB checker 1 % MOD %
S30 RGB checker 2 % MOD %
S31 Window RED (RED=1023) % MOD %
S32 Window GREEN (GREEN=1023) % MOD %
S33 Window BLUE (BLUE=1023) % MOD %
S34 Even line horizontal stripes % MOD %
S35 Odd line horizontal stripes % MOD %
S36 Afterimage check 1 % MOD %
E S39 Afterimage check 4 % MOD %
S40 Red single-color slanting ramp % MOD %
S41 GREEN single-color slanting ramp % MOD %
S42 BLUE single-color slanting ramp % MOD %
S43 For panel light check 1 % MOD %
S44 For panel light check 2 % MOD %
S49 Mask for ABL adjustment % MOD %
F
Note 5: Peak luminance detection function (PKD) modification is impossible.
90 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Last
Memory
MDU MTB mode
MKR S00 MASK OFF % MOD
S01 Raster - White % MOD %
S02 Raster - Red % MOD %
S03 Raster - Green % MOD %
S04 Raster - Blue % MOD %
S05 Raster - Black % MOD %
S06 Raster - Cyan % MOD %
S07 Raster - Magenta % MOD % B
S08 Raster - Yellow % MOD %

S09 Raster - Pink % MOD %
S10 Raster - Yellow egg color % MOD %
S11 Raster - Light blue % MOD %
S12 Raster - Beige % MOD %
S13 Raster - Yellow green % MOD %
S14 Raster - Cyan 120 % MOD %
S15 Raster - Magenta 120 % MOD %
S16 Raster - Yellow 120 % MOD %

S17 Raster - Gray 120 % MOD % C
S18 Raster - Red 626 % MOD %

S19 Raster - Green 626 % MOD %
S20 Raster - Blue 626 % MOD %
S21 Raster - Red 1023+ % MOD %
S22 Raster - Green 1023+ % MOD %
S23 Raster - Blue 1023+ % MOD %
S24 Raster - Green 225 % MOD %
S25 Raster - Gray 307 % MOD %
MSE S00 Product form : one body/monitor model % MOD % Note 1
S01 Product form : System model % MOD % Note 1 D
MST S00 Display one screen %
S01 PsideP (Main size: normal) %
S02 PinP (Right down) %
S03 PinP (Right up) %
S04 PinP (Left down) %
S05 PinP (Left up) %

S08 SWAP (Exchanging sub-screen) %
N
NGP S00 Negative positive inversion: OFF %
S01 Negative positive inversion: ON % E
O
OSD S00 OSD display setting: ON % MAIN
S01 OSD display setting: OFF % MAIN
P
PAV S00 AV selection: FACTORY %
S01 AV selection: STANDARD / PERFORMANCE %
S02 AV selection: DYNAMIC %
S03 AV selection: MOVIE %
S04 AV selection: GAME %
S05 AV selection: SPORT %
F
S06 AV selection: PURE %
S07 AV selection: USER %
PDP-5020FD 91
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
Last
Memory
MDU MTB mode
P
PAV S08 AV selection: isf-DAY %
S09 AV selection: isf-NIGHT %
S10 AV selection: OPTIMUM %
S11 AV selection: isf-AUTO %
S12 AV selection: Standard %
S13 AV selection: Reserved (Australian standard) %
PBH ∗∗∗ Panel white balance adjustment - Blue highlight % MOD %
B PBL ∗∗∗ Panel white balance adjustment - Blue low light % MOD %
PBX ∗∗∗ Panel Bx measuring value % MOD %
PBY ∗∗∗ Panel By measuring value % MOD %
PCS S00 Normal operation %
S01 Catalog specification operation %
PDM S00 Passing PD signals to the POWER SUPPLY Unit => Power-down %
S01 Not passing PD signals to the POWER SUPPLY Unit => No power-down %
PES S00 For general-purpose commonness: Standard %
S01 For general-purpose commonness: Energy saving 1 %
S02 For general-purpose commonness: Energy saving 2 %
S10 For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard %
C
S11 For general-purpose Japan standard: Energy saving 1 %
S12 For general-purpose Japan standard: Energy saving 2 %
PFL S∗∗ Center luminance correction %
S00 Peripheral luminance correction: OFF %
S01 Peripheral luminance correction: ON fixed %
S02 Peripheral luminance correction: APL interlocked ON %
PFN Factory mode at panel side: OFF % %
PFS Setup the panel side to shipment % MOD %
PFY Factory mode at panel side: ON % Note 2
PGB S00 Blue gamma setting: Straight %
D S01 Blue gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6 %
S02 Blue gamma setting: Fixed on 1.7 %
S10-31 Blue gamma setting: Customize %
E
PGG S00 Green gamma setting: Straight %
S01 Green gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6 %
F
S10-31 Green gamma setting: Customize %
PGH ∗∗∗ Panel white balance adjustment - Green highlight % MOD %
Note 2: Mask setting and the picture quality setting of MTB are not changed.
92 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8

Last
Memory
MDU MTB mode
P
PGL ∗∗∗ Panel white balance adjustment - Green low light % MOD %
PGX ∗∗∗ Panel Gx measuring value % MOD %
PGY ∗∗∗ Panel Gy measuring value % MOD %
PGR S00 Red gamma setting: Straight %
S01 Red gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6 %
B
S10-31 Redt gamma setting: Customize %
PKD S00 Peak luminance detection: OFF % %
S01 Peak luminance detection: ON % %
PKL S00 No brightness limitation : 100 % %
C
S01 Brightness limitation 1 : 87 % %
PMT S00 Canceling panel muting % Note 3
S01 Panel muting %
POF Power OFF % % MAIN
D
PON Power ON % % MAIN
PPT S00 Panel protection function: OFF % %
S01 Panel protection function: ON % %

PRH ∗∗∗ Panel white balance adjustment - Red highlight % MOD %
PRL ∗∗∗ Panel white balance adjustment - Red low light % MOD %
PRX ∗∗∗ Panel Rx measuring value % MOD %
PRY ∗∗∗ Panel Ry measuring value % MOD %
PUC S00 Pure cinema: OFF % MAIN %
S01 Pure cinema: Standard % MAIN %
S02 Pure cinema: Advance % MAIN %
E
S03 Pure cinema: Smooth % MAIN %
Q
QAJ Acquiring various adjustment values of the panel side %
QMT Acquiring temperature of MTB/MR side and Fan speed %
QNG Acquiring shutdown information of MTB/MR side %
QPD Acquiring logs of power-down points %
QPM Acquiring data of the pulse meter %
QPW Acquiring panel white balance adjustment values %
QPF Acquiring characteristic / function setting values of the panel side %
QS1 Acquiring unit data, such as the software version % % F
QS2 Acquiring data on the status of the unit, such as temperature %
Note 3: The mute is unable while displaying the internal mask.
PDP-5020FD 93
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
U-com Last
Name Function in Factory Remarks
Memory
MDU MTB mode
Q
QS3 Each information output for panel %
QS5 Each information output for panel (individual function) %
QSE Acquiring unit data, such as the software version of MTB/MR side (specific destination) %
QSP Acquiring sub-version of the microcomputer for panel %
QSD Acquiring data on shutdown %
QSI Acquiring data related with signals %
B R
R1K ∗∗∗ First reset (wedge width) % MOD %
R2K ∗∗∗ Second reset (wedge width) % MOD %
RBL S00-07 BLUE setting for panel degradation correction : Level 0 to 7 % MOD % Note 1
RGL S00-07 GREEN setting for panel degradation correction : Level 0 to 7 % MOD % Note 1
RLS S00 Room light sensor operation : OFF %
S01-05 Room light sensor operation : 1 to 5 %
RRL S00-07 RED setting for panel degradation correction : Level 0 to 7 % MOD % Note 1
S
SAT ∗∗∗ Timing adjustment between the scan and address % MOD %
SCW S00 Normal operation %
C
S01 Draw the warning blue window (left side) %
S02 Draw the warning red window (right side) %
SDF S00 SRS DEFINITION: OFF %
S01 SRS DEFINITION: DEFINITION1 %
SDM S00 Shutdown enabled %
S01 Shutdown prohibited %
SFR S01-08 Measures against AM radio noise - Pattern 1 to 8 % MOD % Note 1
SKM S00 STREAKING correction mode OFF % MOD %
D
S01-08 STREAKING correction mode Setting mode 1 to 8 % MOD %
SMC S00 Smooth clear drive OFF % %
S01 Smooth clear drive ON % %
SML ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the side mask level % MAIN %
SN0 ∗∗∗ Setting of the serial No. 0 (panel) % MOD %
SQM S01 VIDEO sequence setting %
E
S02 PC sequence setting %
S03 FILM sequence setting %
SRS S00 SRS: OFF %
S01 SRS: SRS1 %
S02 SRS: SRS2 %
S03 SRS: SRS3 %
SSM S00 SSCG OFF % %
S01 SSCG ON % %
SWA ∗∗∗ Estimated value of the illuminant color (absolute value) %
SWF S00 Reflection of the estimated information of the illuminant color: OFF %
F S01 Reflection of the estimated information of the illuminant color: ON %
SWR ∗∗∗ Estimated value of the illuminant color (relative value) %
94 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
U-com Last
Memory
MDU MTB mode
S
SZM S00 Setting the screen size to Dot by Dot % MAIN
S01 Setting the screen size to 4 :3 % MAIN
S02 Setting the screen size to FULL or FULL 1080i % MAIN

S03 Setting the screen size to ZOOM % MAIN
S04 Setting the screen size to CINEMA % MAIN
S05 Setting the screen size to WIDE or WIDE1 % MAIN
S11 Setting the screen size to AUTO % MAIN B

S12 Setting the screen size to WIDE1 % MAIN
T
TBS S00 TRUBASS: OFF %
S01 TRUBASS: TRUBASS1 %

THS S00 Theater port interlock operation OFF %
S01 Theater port interlock operation ON %
U
UAJ Determining the flag for the DIGITAL Assy adjustment in "not adjusted" % MOD % C
UP∗ To add ∗ to the adjustment value (∗ = 0 to 9, add 10 with UP0 and set to %
maximum value with UPF)
V
V1F ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs 1, 2 voltage % MOD %
V3F ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs 3 voltage % MOD %
V4F ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs 4 voltage % MOD %
VFQ S02 Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-50 Hz % MOD %
S03 Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-60 Hz % MOD %
S05 Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-72 Hz % MOD %
S06 Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-75 Hz-1 % MOD %
S07 Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-75 Hz-2 % MOD % D
S13 Setting the frequency in Mask mode to PC-60 Hz % MOD %

VOF ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vysnofs voltage % MOD %
UP∗,
VOL DW∗, To adjust the volume % Note 4
∗∗∗
VRP ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vyprst voltage % MOD %
VSU ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vsus voltage % MOD %
VX1 ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vxpofs1 voltage % MOD %
VX2 ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Vxpofs2 voltage % MOD %
VYF ∗∗∗ Adjustment of the reference value of Δ Vyknofs1, 2/3/4 voltage % MOD %
W E
WBI S00 Panel WB standard output mode: OFF % %

S01 Panel WB standard output mode: ON % %
X
X1B ∗∗∗ 3SF and later-first XSUS (resonance up width) % MOD %
X3B ∗∗∗ 2SF-third XSUS (resonance up width) % MOD %
XSB ∗∗∗ 2SF-repeat XSUS (resonance up width) % MOD %
Note 4: Use this command by designating the adjustment value *** (=000 to 060).
PDP-5020FD 95
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
U-com Last
Memory
MDU MTB mode
Y
Y1K ∗∗∗ 1SF-YSUS-Tail (wedge width) % MOD %
Y1Z ∗∗∗ 1SF-YSUS-Tail (resonance down width) % MOD %
Y2B ∗∗∗ 2SF-second YSUS (resonance up width) % MOD %
Y2K ∗∗∗ 2SF-YSUS-Tail (wedge width) % MOD %
Y2Z ∗∗∗ 2SF-YSUS-Tail (resonance down width) % MOD %
YNK ∗∗∗ 3SF and later (SSF 2 pulses)-YSUS Tail (wedge width) % MOD %
B YTK ∗∗∗ 3SF and later-YSUS Tail (wedge width) % MOD %
YTZ ∗∗∗ 3SF and later-YSUS Tail (resonance down width) % MOD %
YSB ∗∗∗ 2SF-repeat YSUS (resonance up width) % MOD %
Z
ZME ∗∗∗ Initializing the video EEPROM data of the MTB/MR side % %
96 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
5.9 DETAILS OF EACH COMMANDS
A
[1] QS1 (PANEL STATUS)
Model information and version information are returned.
Command Effective Operation

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QS1] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 112 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 117 Byte
Data
Data Arrangement Length Output Example 11: Derivative Operation Identification
ECO 3 byte QS1 ∗ Standard model operation
1 Derivative model operation B
1 Resolution/Size 1 byte F
2 Panel Generation 1 byte 9
3 Destination 1 byte ∗ 14: MTB Generation
4 Grade 1 byte ∗ 9 G9
5 Panel Product Form 1 byte A

15: MTB Destination
6 Boot version of Module microcomputer 3 byte -01A
A North America
7 Program version of Module microcomputer 8 byte -01A ‘ ’ ’ ’
C China
8 Boot version of sequence processor 3 byte -01Z
E Europe
9 Program version of sequence processor 8 byte -01Z ‘ ’ ’ ’
G General
10 Panel information 8 byte G9_50F_2 J Japan
C
11 Derivative operation identification 1 byte ∗ U Australia

12 Reserved (panel section) 7 byte ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
13 , (comma) 1 byte , 16: MTB Grade
14 MTB generation 1 byte 9 H Elite/One body Europe HD
/System Europe HD/One body
15 MTB destination 1 byte A Australia
16 MTB grade 1 byte H T Regular/One body Europe SD
17 MTB product form 1 byte B D Derivative Model
18 Program version of IF microcomputer 8 byte -01A
∗ No Grade (Japan/General/China)
19 Boot version of IF microcomputer 4 byte 01A D
20 Program version of Main microcomputer 8 byte -01A 17: MTB Product Form
21 Boot version of Main microcomputer 4 byte 01A B One body model
22 Common version of ASIC 8 byte -01A S System model
23 Boot version of ASIC 8 byte 01A
24 PRS version of ASIC 8 byte -01A
25 PIC version of ASIC 8 byte -01A
26 Common version of the Digital Tuner 8 byte -0A
27 Boot version of the Digital Tuner 4 byte 01A
CS 2 Byte 2 byte 4A
E
1: Resolution/Size 3: Destination 10: Panel Information (8 Byte)

F 50-FHD (1920∗1080) ∗ Commonness 1 to 2nd byte G9 Generation information
G 60-FHD (1920∗1080) 4 to 5th byte 50 50 inch
4: Grade 60 60 inch
2: Panel Generation ∗ Commonness 6th byte F FHD
9 G9 Z Evaluation 8th byte 3 50 inch 2nd PLANT (Reserved)
2 50 inch 2nd PLANT
5: Panel Product Form 1 50 inch 1st PLANT
A One body/monitor model ‘ Others F
S System model ‘ = space
PDP-5020FD 97
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2] QS2 (PANEL OPERATION DATA)
The command QS2 is for acquiring data on the panel's operational information.

Function Remarks
Format Modes
Data
Data Arrangement Output Example
Length
B ECO 3 byte QS2 9: SD data
1 Notify of the standby operation transition 1 byte 1 0 No SD
2 Adjustment flag of the main unit 1 byte 0 1 SQ_LSI
3 Adjustment-data backup flag 1 byte 0 2 MDU-DEVICE
4 "1st PD" data 1 byte 0 3 RST2
5 "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0 4 Panel temperature
6 Color sensor data 1 byte 0

10-1: SD subcategory (SQ_LSI)
7 Reserved 2 byte ∗∗
0 No SD-Sub data
8 Temperature data (TEMP 1) 3 byte 128
1 Communication error
C 9 SD data 1 byte 0
2 Drive stop
10 SD subcategory data 1 byte 0
3 BUSY
11 Operation status induced by SD 1 byte 0
4 Version mismatching (H/S)
12 Reserved 3 byte ∗∗∗ 5 Version mismatching (H/M)
13 HOUR METER 8 byte 00000259 6 Version mismatching (H/I)
14 MASK indication 1 byte 0
15 Still picture detection 1 byte 0 10-2: SD subcategory (MDU-DEVICE)
16 SCAN protection detection 1 byte 0 0 No SD-Sub data
17 Panel crack detection 1 byte 0 1 EEPROM
18 Address emergency detection 1 byte 0 2 BACKUP

D
19 Reserved 4 byte ∗∗∗∗ 3 DAC
CS 2 Byte 2 byte 4A
10-3: SD subcategory
(Panel temperature)
1: Power supply status 4, 5: PD data
0 No SD-Sub data
P During power ON 0 No PD data
1 Panel high temperature
Shifting to Passive 2 POWER
0 2 Panel low temperature
Standby is not 3 SCAN
possible.
4 SCN-5V 11: Operation status
Shifting to Passive
1 Standby is possible. 6 Y-DCDC induced by SD
E
7 Y-SUS 0 Normal
8 ADRS 1 Relay-off completed

2: Adjustment flag of
A X-DCDC During warning
the main unit 2
indication
B X-SUS
0 Adjustment completed
C DIG-DCDC 14: MASK indication
Adjustment not
1
completed F UNKNOWN 0 MASK-OFF
1 MASK-ON
6: Color sensor data
3: Adjustment-data - Function OFF (including standby) 15 to 18: Detection of Each Protection function
backup flag
F 0 Normal 0 Normal operation
0 Adjustment completed
1 Hardware connection is not completed 1 At detection of protection operation
1 Adjustment not completed
2 Data mismatching
98 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[3] QS3 (OTHER DATA ON THE PANEL)
The command QS3 is for acquiring data on operational information of the panel.

Function Remarks
Format Modes
Data
Length
ECO 3 byte QS3
B
1 SERIAL 15 byte ---------------
2 HOUR METER 8 byte 00000000
3 TOTAL HR METER 8 byte 00000000
4 PON COUNTER 8 byte 00000000
5 Panel temperature (*1) 5 byte 23.5 Note
(*1) : Centigrade scale
6 Reserved (TEMP0 acquisition) 5 byte _ _ _._
7 MAX panel temperature history (*1) 5 byte 78.3
8 Reserved 4 byte ∗∗∗∗
CS 2 Byte 2 byte 94
C
[4] QS5 (COLOR SENSOR DATA)

The command QS5 is for acquiring the color sensor information.
D
Function Remarks
Format Modes
Data
Length
ECO 3 byte QS5
1 Color sensor data (Note) 1 byte 2
2 RED data of color sensor 4 byte 0425
3 GREEN data of color sensor 4 byte 2112
E
4 BLUE data of color sensor 4 byte 5000
5 Reserved 32 byte ∗∗ to ∗∗
CS 2 Byte 2 byte 94
Note: The color sensor data is output as the same data as QS2.
PDP-5020FD 99
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[5] QSP (SUB VERSION OF THE PANEL SECTION)
The command QSP is for acquiring sub version data on software of the panel.

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QSP] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 40 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 45 Byte
Data
Length
ECO 3 byte QSP
B
1 MDUcom-PRG 8 byte =01Y
2 MDUcom-DATA_TBL 8 byte =01Y ’ ’ ’ ’
3 SQ_LSI-PRG 4 byte =01Y
4 SQ_LSI-PIC_TBL 8 byte =01Y ’ ’ ’ ’
5 SQ_LSI-SEQ_DATA 4 byte =01Y
6 Reserved 8 byte ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
CS 2 Byte 2 byte A3
100 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[6] QAJ (PANEL ADJUSTMENT DATA)
The command QAJ is for acquiring the panel's factory-preset data.

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QAJ] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 84 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 89 Byte
Data 27: AM radio countermeasure

Data Arrangement Length Output Example
n n: 1 to 8 (SUS frequency n)
ECO 3 byte QAJ
B
1 Vsus adjustment value 3 byte 128
2 Vysnofs adjustment value 3 byte 128
3 Vyprst adjustment value 3 byte 128
4 Vxpofs1 adjustment value 3 byte 128
5 Vxpofs2 adjustment value 3 byte 128
6 Vyknofs1,2 adjustment value 3 byte 128
7 Vyknofs3 adjustment value 3 byte 128
8 Vyknofs4 adjustment value 3 byte 128
9 Δ Vyknofs1,2/3/4 adjustment value 3 byte 128
C
10 Reserved 6 byte ∗∗∗∗∗∗
11 R1K adjustment value 3 byte 128
12 R2K adjustment value 3 byte 128
13 Y1K adjustment value 3 byte 128
14 Y1Z adjustment value 3 byte 128
15 X1B adjustment value 3 byte 128
16 Y2B adjustment value 3 byte 128
17 X3B adjustment value 3 byte 128
18 YSB adjustment value 3 byte 128
D
19 XSB adjustment value 3 byte 128
20 YTK adjustment value 3 byte 128
21 YTZ adjustment value 3 byte 128
22 Y2K adjustment value 3 byte 128
23 Y2Z adjustment value 3 byte 128
24 YNK adjustment value 3 byte 128
25 SAT adjustment value 3 byte 128
26 Reserved 3 byte ∗∗∗
27 AM radio countermeasure 1 byte 1
E
28 Reserved 2 byte ∗∗
CS 2 Byte 2 byte B7
PDP-5020FD 101
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[7] QPW (VIDEO ADJUSTMENT DATA OF THE PANEL)
The command QPW is for acquiring the factory-preset data about the video of the panel.

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QPW] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 40 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 45 Byte
Data Output 1: Type of Drive

Data Arrangement Example sequence
Length
ECO 3 byte QPW 50VS Video 50 Hz
B 1 Type of drive sequence (Note 1) 4 byte 60VS 60VS Video 60 Hz 11, 12, 13: RGB Gamma setting
2 ABL adjustment table 1 byte 1 72VS Video 72 Hz n 00 to 31
3 Type of WB adjustment table 1 byte 1 75V1 Video 75-1 Hz
(Note 1) 15: Center luminance
75V2 Video 75-2 Hz correction
4 ABL adjustment value 3 byte 128 60PS PC 60 Hz 0 OFF
5 R-HIGH adjustment value 3 byte 256
1 ON
6 G-HIGH adjustment value 3 byte 256 2: ABL adjustment
table 2 ON (interlocked with APL)
7 B-HIGH adjustment value 3 byte 256 n n: 1 to 3
8 R-LOW adjustment value 3 byte 512
17: Interlocked with APL
9 G-LOW adjustment value 3 byte 512 3: Type of WB
C adjustment table 0 OFF
10 B-LOW adjustment value 3 byte 512 n n: 1 to 4 1 ON
11 R gamma setting 2 byte 31
2 WB interlocked ON/γ OFF
12 G gamma setting 2 byte 10
3 WB interlocked OFF/γ ON
13 B gamma setting 2 byte 10
14 Streaking correction 1 byte 1
18: Transition of protective
15 Center luminance correction 1 byte 0 operations
16 Reserved 1 byte ∗ 0 Upper limit state for brightness
17 Interlocked with APL 1 byte 0 1 Brightness being reduced
18 Transition of protective operations 1 byte 0 2 Lower limit state for brightness
D
19 Reserved 2 byte ∗∗ 3 Brightness being increased
CS 2 Byte 2 byte 37
Note 1: The "75 Hz-2" Drive Sequence type signals and WB Adjustment Table 4 are output only
when "75 Hz-2" (VFQS07) is selected for internal signals (mask signals).
When external signals are selected and the Drive Sequence type is 75 Hz, "75 Hz-1" is
output because "75 Hz-1" and "75 Hz-2" are not distinguished for external signals.
102 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[8] QPF (FUNCTION OF THE PANEL)
The command QPF is for acquiring the characteristic and the function setting value of the panel.
Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QPF] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 69 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 74 Byte
Data 1: 2: 3: RGB-REVISE setting value

n n: 0 to 7 (Level n)
ECO 3 byte QPF
1 R-REVISE setting value 1 byte 0 5 to 8: ADDRESS α, β setting
B
nm n: 0 to 9 (Address α setting PHASE n)
2 G-REVISE setting value 1 byte 0
m: 0 to 9 (Address β setting PHASE m)
3 B-REVISE setting value 1 byte 0
4 Reserved 3 byte ∗∗∗ 10: Streaking correction
5 ADDRESS L1,L2 setting value 2 byte 01 0 OFF
6 ADDRESS L3,L4 setting value 2 byte 13 n n: 1 to 8 (Mode n)
7 ADDRESS U1,U2 setting value 2 byte 32
8 ADDRESS U3,U4 setting value 2 byte 30 11: Full-screen black display mode
9 Reserved 4 byte ∗∗∗∗ 0 OFF (In-phase SUS drive prohibition)
10 Streaking correction 1 byte 1 1 MODE1 (In-phase SUS drive permission)
C
11 Full-screen black display mode 1 byte 1
13 PANEL RX 3 byte 512
14 PANEL RY 3 byte 512
15 PANEL GX 3 byte 512
16 PANEL GY 3 byte 512
17 PANEL BX 3 byte 512
18 PANEL BY 3 byte 512
19 Reserved 6 byte ∗∗∗∗∗∗
D
20 Color sensor R coefficient 3 byte ∗∗∗
21 Color sensor G coefficient 3 byte ∗∗∗
22 Color sensor B coefficient 3 byte ∗∗∗
23 Reserved 12 byte ∗∗ to ∗∗
CS 2 Byte 2 byte 37
[9] QPM (PULSE METER VALUE)

The command QPM is for acquiring the accumulated pulse count.
Command Effective Operation E

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QPM] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 40 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 45 Byte
Data
Length
ECO 3 byte QPM
1 Pulse meter B 1 8 byte 00000000
4 Pulse meter B 4 8 byte 00000000 F
Note:
The minimum for a returned value of the pulse meter for each
CS 2 Byte 2 byte E7 block (B1-B2) is one million.
PDP-5020FD 103
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[10] QPD (POWER DOWN LOGS)
The command QPD is for acquiring data from the 8 latest power-down (PD) logs.
Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QPD] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 80 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 85 Byte
Data Arrangement Data Output Example

Length " PD data
ECO 3 byte QPD 0 No PD
B 1 Latest "1st PD" data 1 byte A 2 P-POWER
2 Latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 2 3 SCAN
3 Data from the hour meter for the latest PD 8 byte 00010020 4 SCN-5V
4 Second latest "1st PD" data 1 byte E 6 Y-DCDC
5 Second latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 9 7 Y-SUS
6 Data from the hour meter for the second latest PD 8 byte 00008523 8 Address
7 Third latest "1st PD" data 1 byte 4 A X-DCDC
8 Third latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 3 B X-SUS
9 Data from the hour meter for the third latest PD 8 byte 00004335 C DIGI-DCDC
C 10 Fourth latest "1st PD" data 1 byte 2 F UNKNOWN
11 Fourth latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0
12 Data from the hour meter for the fourth latest PD 8 byte 00000945
13 Fifth latest "1st PD" data 1 byte 4
14 Fifth latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0
15 Data from the hour meter for the fifth latest PD 8 byte 00000715
16 Sixth latest "1st PD" data 1 byte A
17 Sixth latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 2
18 Data from the hour meter for the sixth latest PD 8 byte 00000552
19 Seventh latest "1st PD" data 1 byte A
D
20 Seventh latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0
21 Data from the hour meter for the seventh latest PD 8 byte 00000213
22 Eighth latest "1st PD" data 1 byte D
23 Eighth latest "2nd PD" data 1 byte 0
24 Data from the hour meter for the eighth latest PD 8 byte 000001A7
CS 2 Byte 2 byte 27
104 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[11] QSD (SHUTDOWN LOGS of the Panel Section)
The command QSD is for acquiring the data from the 8 latest shutdown (SD) logs of the panel section.

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QSD] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 80 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 85 Byte
Data " SD data

0 No SD
ECO 3 byte QSD 1 SQ_LSI
1 Latest SD data 1 byte 1 2 MDU-DEVICE B
2 Latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0 3 RST2
3 Data from the hour meter for the latest SD 8 byte 00752013 4 Panel temperature
4 Second latest SD data 1 byte 5
5 Second latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0 " SD subcategory (SQ_LSI)
6 Data from the hour meter for the second latest SD 8 byte 00495204 0 No SD-Sub data
7 Third latest SD data 1 byte 2 1 Communication error
8 Third latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 3 2 Drive stop
9 Data from the hour meter for the third latest SD 8 byte 00100355 3 BUSY
10 Fourth latest SD data 1 byte 2 4 Version mismatching (H/S)

C
5 Version mismatching (H/M)
11 Fourth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 5
6 Version mismatching (H/I)
12 Data from the hour meter for the fourth latest SD 8 byte 00075620
13 Fifth latest SD data 1 byte 1
" SD subcategory (MDU-DEVICE)
14 Fifth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0
0 No SD-Sub data
15 Data from the hour meter for the fifth latest SD 8 byte 00000852
1 EEPROM
16 Sixth latest SD data 1 byte 2
2 BACKUP
17 Sixth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 2
3 DAC
18 Data from the hour meter for the sixth latest SD 8 byte 00000451
19 Seventh latest SD data 1 byte 0
" SD subcategory D
20 Seventh latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0 (Panel temperature)
21 Data from the hour meter for the seventh latest SD 8 byte 00000000 0 No SD-Sub data
22 Eighth latest SD data 1 byte 0 1 TEMP1 (high temperature)
23 Eighth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0 2 TEMP1 (low temperature)
24 Data from the hour meter for the eighth latest SD 8 byte 00000000
CS 2 Byte 2 Byte 7D
PDP-5020FD 105
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[12] QSE (DESTINATION PECULIAR INFORMATION)
Induce it peculiar, individual information is acquired.

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QSE] Every time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 28 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 33 Byte

Length
ECO 3 byte QSE
B
1 Check flag for production 1 byte E
3 DTB HARDWARE version 4 byte 0342
4 Reserved 16 byte ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
5 User setting password 4 byte 1234
CS Check Sum 2 byte 13
[13] QMT (STATUS INFORMATION OF MTB/MR SECTION)

Temperature information / FAN rotation state / Room light sensor information on the MTB/MR section is acquired.
D Command Effective Operation

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QMT] Every time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 8 (DATA) = 11 Byte

Length
ECO 3 byte QMT
1 A/D value of temperature of MTB/MR section 3 byte 276
FAN rotating speed of MTB/MR section
2 1 byte 1
(0: STOP, 1: LOW, 2: HIGH)
E 3 A/D value of room light sensor 3 byte 009
4 Level of room light sensor (Value: 1 to 5) 1 byte 5
* Returned each block.
106 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[14] QNG (SHUTDOWN INFORMATION OF MTB SECTION)
The command QNG is for acquiring the data from the 8 latest shutdown (SD) logs of the MTB section.

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QNG] Every time To acquire data on the shutdown (NG) Return data: 3 (ECO) + 96 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 101 Byte
logs of MTB side
Data
ECO 3 byte QNG B

1 Latest SD data 1 byte 1
2 Latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0
3 Data from the MTB hour meter for the latest SD 7 byte 0752013
4 Reserved 3 byte 000 fixed
5 Second latest SD data 1 byte 5
6 Second latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 1
7 Data from the MTB hour meter for the second latest SD 7 byte 0495204
9 Third latest SD data 1 byte A C
10 Third latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 2
11 Data from the MTB hour meter for the third latest SD 7 byte 0365814
13 Fourth latest SD data 1 byte 5
14 Fourth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0
15 Data from the MTB hour meter for the fourth latest SD 7 byte 0256612
17 Fifth latest SD data 1 byte 7
18 Fifth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 2
D
19 Data from the MTB hour meter for the fifth latest SD 7 byte 0105628
21 Sixth latest SD data 1 byte B
22 Sixth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 0
23 Data from the MTB hour meter for the sixth latest SD 7 byte 0003009
25 Seventh latest SD data 1 byte C
26 Seventh latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 1
27 Data from the MTB hour meter for the seventh latest SD 7 byte 00002A9
28 Reserved 3 byte 000 fixed E
29 Eighth latest SD data 1 byte C

30 Eighth latest SD subcategory data 1 byte 4
31 Data from the MTB hour meter for the eighth latest SD 7 byte 0000012
CS 2 Byte 2 Byte 7D
PDP-5020FD 107
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
< SD Information No. >
Frequency * Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation)
1 Failure of Power Supply of VCC Immediately Shutdown
5 Shutdown signal from D-Amp. / short-circuit of speaker terminal Go to No. 5 Subcategory Information
6 Failure of communication with Module microcomputer Immediately Shutdown
7 Failure in 3-wire serial communication of Main microcomputer Go to No. 7 Subcategory Information
8 Failure in IIC communication of Main microcomputer Go to No. 8 Subcategory Information
9 Failure in Communication of Main microcomputer Immediately Shutdown
10(A) Abnormally in FAN Go to No. 10 Subcategory Information
B
11(B) Abnormally in high temperature Immediately Shutdown
12(C) Failure in Digital Tuner Go to No. 12 Subcategory Information
13(D) Failure in Power Supply at MTB section Go to No. 13 Subcategory Information
15(F) Failure in Main EEPROM Immediately Shutdown
∗: Indicates the frequency of Blue LED flashing when the shutdown is occurred.
< No. 5 Subcategory Information on "Shutdown signal < No. 10 Subcategory Information on "Abnormally in
from D-Amp./short-circuit of speaker terminal" > FAN" >
Value Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation) Value Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation)
C Shutdown after 5 1 FAN 1 Immediately Shutdown
1 A_NG seconds warning
2 FAN 2 Immediately Shutdown
Shutdown after 5
2 OTW seconds warning
< No. 12 Subcategory Information on "Failure in
Digital Tuner" >
< No. 7 Subcategory Information on "Failure in 3-wire
Value Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation)
serial communication of Main microcomputer" >
1 Starting error of the digital tuner Communication stop
2 Communication error with the digital tuner
Communication error of IF Immediately
1 Shutdown 3 DTB device error
microcomputer
D 4 Abnormmally in BCM7038
2 Immediately
Communication error of ARIA
Shutdown 5 Fugue
6 Audio Chip
< No. 8 Subcategory Information on "Failure in 7 Tuner 1/Tuner 1 or 2
IIC communication of Main microcomputer" > 8 Card I/F IC
Value Shutdown Factor Remarks (Operation) 9 VBI Slicer
1 Tuner 1 Immediately Shutdown B Flash
2 MSP/MAP Immediately Shutdown C EEPROM
3 AV-Switch Immediately Shutdown D EEPROM
4 RGB-Switch Immediately Shutdown F DTV Antenna

E
G Home Gallery
5 Main VDEC Immediately Shutdown
I Application
6 VDEC-SDRAM Immediately Shutdown
J DEMOD(US)/COFDEM(EU)
7 AD/PLL Immediately Shutdown K Tuner 2
8 HDMI Immediately Shutdown L S2DEMOD
9 DisplayPortTx Immediately Shutdown M LNB
B US-MAP Immediately Shutdown
C GCR Immediately Shutdown < No. 13 Subcategory Information on "Failure in
D COFDEM Immediately Shutdown
Power supply at MTB section" >
F
1 RST 2 Immediately Shutdown
2 RST 4 Immediately Shutdown
108 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[15] QSI (INPUT SIGNAL DATA)
The command QSI is for acquiring all data on input video signals.

Function Remarks
Format Modes
[QSI] Every Time Output of status Return data: 3 (ECO) + 66 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 71 Byte
Data Output 18 to 20: Each protection function

Data Arrangement Length Example
0 Setting: OFF
ECO 3 Byte QSI
1 Setting: ON (during wait) B
1 Type of drive sequence (Note) 4 Byte 60VS
2 Type of ABL adjustment table (Note) 1 Byte 1 2 Setting: ON (during operation)
3 Type of WB adjustment table (Note) 1 Byte 1

4 Reserved 4 Byte ∗∗∗∗ 21: Transition of protection
operations
5 Total value of PRH 4 Byte 0256
0 Upper limit status for brightness
6 Total value of PGH 4 Byte 0256
1 Brightness being reduced
7 Total value of PBH 4 Byte 0256
2 Lower limit status for brightness
8 Reserved 4 Byte ∗∗∗∗
3 Brightness being increased
9 Total value of PRL 4 Byte 0512
C
10 Total value of PGL 4 Byte 0512
22: Address emergency status
11 Total value of PBL 4 Byte 0512
12 Total value of ABL 3 Byte 128 0 Normal status
13 V frequency distinction 4 Byte 6002 1 Emergency status
14 Reserved 4 Byte ∗∗∗∗

15 APL acquiring data 4 Byte 1023 23: Reset operation status
16 Number of SUS pulses 4 Byte 0457 A All reset operation
17 Detection status of still picture 1 Byte 1 2 Interlace 1/2 reset operation
18 Detection status of cracking in the panel 1 Byte 1 4 Interlace 1/4 reset operation
19 Detection status of SCAN protection 1 Byte 1 L Reset less operation (specifications D
20 Detection status of external protection 1 Byte 1 operation)
21 Transition of protection operations 1 Byte 0

24: In-phase SUS mode status
22 Address emergency status 1 Byte 1
23 Detection status of reset operation 1 Byte 1 0 Normal status
24 In-phase SUS mode status 1 Byte 1 1 In-phase SUS mode status
25 Reserved 1 Byte 1 2 Assist status at the cancellation
CS 2 Byte 2 Byte 27
Note: The types of drive sequence and ABL/WB table are output as the same data as QPW.
E
PDP-5020FD 109
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[16] DRV (PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON/OFF)
Panel drive-power ON/OFF (drive ON/OFF) is controllable.
Operation
Function Remarks
Format Modes
If a command is issued in Standby mode, and the unit is left
[DRV+S00] Every time DRIVE OFF
unoperated for more than 10 seconds, the command will become void.
[DRV+S01] Every time DRIVE ON (default)
Note: The function of the DRIVE OFF key on the remote control unit for servicing is the same as that of the DRVS00 command.
B (A function equivalent to that of the DRVS01 command is not provided for the remote control unit for servicing.)
[17] FAY/FAN (ADJUSTMENT COMMANDS PERMISSION/PROHIBITION)

The commands FAY/FAN are for prohibiting/permitting panel/MTB-adjustment commands.
Operation
Command
Effective Operation Remarks
Format Control
C
Modes
Normal operation mode For details, refer to the section “6.1 [3] FUNCTIONS WHEN
[FAY] Adjustment command is valid.
while the power is on ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE”.
[FAN] During FAY Adjustment command is invalid.
[18] FAJ/UAJ/CBU/BCP (BACKUP FUNCTION FOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE)

When the DIGITAL Assy is to be replaced, adjustment values can be copied from the backup EEPROM to the EEPROM
D of the Assy for service.
Operation
Command Remarks
Format Effective Control
Operation Modes
To make the status of the EEPROM on the DIGITAL This takes at least 350 msec.
[FAJ] Assy "adjustment completed" and copy the data to the
EEPROM for backup
To make the status of the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Only the status is changed, and the real data
[UAJ] Assy "adjustment not completed" are not erased.
During FAY
[CBU] To make the status of the EEPROM on for backup Only the status is changed, and the real data
"adjustment not completed" are not erased. However, if the status of the
E EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy is
"adjustment completed," the data in the
EEPROM of the DIGITAL Assy will be copied
to the EEPROM for backup upon POF.
To copy the backup data from the EEPROM for backup
[BCP]
to the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy
110 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
6. SERVICE FACTORY MODE

6.1 OUTLINE OF THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE
A
Operations during Service Factory mode are described here.
[1] SERVICE FACTORY MODE TRANSITION CHART
Standby mode Power supply ON mode

POWER FACT FACT
[POF] [FAY] HOME MENU
[FAN]
B
• The function is changed. Effective IR in Factory mode
• The signal mode is changed. INFORMATION
(MTB INFORMATION)
PANEL FACTORY RS-232C Factory mode
[ (MUTING)]
OPTION
C
INITIALIZE
Effective 232C
command in Factory mode
[2] HOW TO ENTER/EXIT SERVICE FACTORY MODE

How to enter Service Factory Mode How to enter Service Factory Mode by Using the D
By using a PDP service remote control) supplied Remote Control Unit
• PDP service remote control : Press [FACTORY] key.
• From this model, can not enter the Service Factory Mode
By issuing RS-232C commands )
by operating the supplied remote control unit keys.
• During normal Standby mode : Issue [PON] then [FAY].
• During normal operation mode : Issue [FAY].
How to exit Service Factory Mode
By using a PDP service remote control)
• PDP service remote control : press [FACTORY] key.
• Supplied remote control unit : press [HOME MENU] key.
By issuing RS-232C commands)
• Issue [FAN]. E
PDP-5020FD 111
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[3] FUNCTIONS WHEN ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE
Fuctions whose setting are set to OFF

The settings for the following functions are set to OFF when Service Factory mode is entered
(including when the “FAY” command is received) :
Function Remarks
2-Screen Operation Input function set on the main side is selected.
FREEZE
Auto size, Side Mask It is not performed during Factory mode.
B ORBITER, Mask control Central value operation (ORBITER)
Sleep Timer Cancel the operation.
Room light sensor Turn off the detecting operation (Setting data will be retained.)
Blue LED dimmer Turn off the operation (Setting data will be retained.)
Setting of Parental Control When this is turned off, the block of the screen is released.
Power Control Turn off the operation (However, the setting maintains it.)
Image Position Central value operation
Note: Enter the factory after cancelling ACI because the ACI operation setting OFF and not done.
User data
User data will be treated as follows :
• User data on picture-quality and audio-quality adjustments are not reflected, and factory-preset data are output
(user data will be retained in memory). When the unit enters Service Factory mode, the current audio-quality adjustment
data will be still be retained in memory.
• User-setting data will be applied to the various settings (items on the menus), signal formats, and the items that are
D associated with path change (HDMI settings, etc.).
• Data on screen (i.e., screen position; meaning clock dividers, and not including data on screen size).
Are reset to the default values (data stored in memory will be retained).
Screen size will be retained.
112 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[4] REMOTE CONTROL CODE IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE
Remote Control Keys Basic Functions Remarks

MUTING Switching the main items. Shifting to the next main item (top).
j (DOWN) Switching the subtitled items. Shifting downward to the next subtitiled item.
i (UP) Switching the subtitled items. Shifting upward to the next upper layer.
k (LEFT) Decreasing the adjustment value. Decreasing the adjustment value.
l (RIGHT) Increasing the adjustment value. Increasing the adjustment value.
ENTER/SET Switching the layers. Shifting downward or upward to the next lower or upper layer.
INPUT Selecting INPUT. Shifting the INPUT to the next function. B
INPUTxx Selecting INPUT. Switching the INPUT to xx. (xx=1 to 7 etc)

CH+/P+ Increasing the channel number.
CH-/P- Decreasing the channel number.
Numeric Keys Function: TV Function: TV (previously selected channel number is selected)
POWER Power OFF. Turning the power off.
Factory OFF (Factory mode) In Factory mode, turning Factory mode off.
FACTORY
Factory ON (Non-Factory mode). In Non-Factory mode, turn Fuctory mode on.
HOME MENU Menu ON. In Factory mode, turn Factory mode off.
VOLUME+ Volume UP. Increasing 10 the adjustment value. (PANEL FACTORY) C
VOLUME- Volume DOWN. Decreasing 10 the adjustment value. (PANEL FACTORY)

DRIVE OFF (Note1) Drive Mode OFF. Turning Drive mode off.
INTEGRATOR INTEGRATOR MENU ON. Enter INTEGRATOR MODE.
(Note 1) When ten seconds have passed since the [DRIVE OFF] key was pressed at the standby, it becomes invalid.
Please press [POWER] key from the [DRIVE OFF] key pressing within ten seconds when you do power supply ON while
driven OFF.
PDP service Supplied

remote control remote control F
PDP-5020FD 113
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[5] PDP SERVICE REMOTE CONTROL
• The keys labeled with the same names on the service remote control unit have the same functions as those of the supplied
remote control unit. (See "2.3 PANEL FACILITIES.")
• For the keys not provided on the supplied remote control unit, see the explanations below:
GENERATION switch for remote control codes

This switch selects the generation of remote control
codes to be transmitted:
B 1: The old-generation codes are transmitted.
2: The new-generation codes are transmitted.
With this generation plasma display,
set the switch to 2.
INTEGRATOR
Press this key to enter Integrator mode.
INPUT
Press this key to cyclically change the input source.
EXT INPUT
Press this key to cyclically change only the
external input source.
D
SUB INPUT
Not used with this model.
DRIVE OFF
FACTORY
Press this key to turn off the panel drive.
Press this key to enter Factory mode.
For details on how to cancel this command,
2nd FACTORY
see the explanation for the DRV command.
AUTO SETUP
POWER CONTROL
Use this key for automatic setup, such as
the display position setting when an analog
PC signal is input. CLEAR
ID NO. SET Not used with this model.
E
Not used with this model. POWER ON
Press this key to turn on the unit.
This key cannot turn the unit off.
POWER OFF
Press this key to turn off the unit.
This key cannot turn the unit on.
POINT ZOOM
ZOOM +/-
114 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[6] FACTORY HIERARCHICAL TABLE
Large Item
Middle Item Variable / Adjustment Range Remarks
Small Item
6.2 [1] INFORMATION
[1-1] VERSION (1)
[1-2] VERSION (2)
[1-3] MAIN NG CLEAR <=> NO <=> YES
[1-4] TEMPERATURE
[1-5] HOUR METER CLEAR <=> NO <=> YES
[1-6] HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1
[1-8] VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1
[1-9] VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 B
6.2 [2] PANEL FACTORY (+)
[2-1] PANEL INFORMATION
[2-2] PANEL WORKS
[2-3] POWER DOWN
[2-4] SHUT DOWN
[2-5] PANEL-1 ADJ (+) VOL SUS <=> 000 to 255
VOL OFFSET <=> 000 to 255
VOL RST P <=> 000 to 255
VOL XPOFS1 <=> 000 to 255
VOL XPOFS2 <=> 000 to 255
VOL YKNOFS1 D <=> 000 to 255
VOL YKNOFSA D <=> 000 to 255 C
RESET1ST_KSB <=> 112 to 144
RESET2ND_KSB <=> 112 to 144
YSTL_1SF_KSB <=> 112 to 144
YSTL_1SF_HZ <=> 112 to 144
XSUS_1ST_B <=> 112 to 144
YSUS_2ND_B <=> 112 to 144
XSUS_3RD_B <=> 112 to 144
YSUS_B <=> 112 to 144
XSUS_B <=> 112 to 144
YSTL_KSB <=> 112 to 144
YSTL_HZ <=> 112 to 144
YSTL_2SF_KSB <=> 112 to 144
YSTL_2SF_HZ <=> 112 to 144
YSTL_FMR_KSB <=> 112 to 144
D
SCAN ADRS ADJ <=> 112 to 144
SUS FREQ <=> <=> MODE 1 to MODE 8 <=>
[2-6] PANEL-2 ADJ (+) R-HIGH <=> 000 to 999
G-HIGH <=> 000 to 999
B-HIGH <=> 000 to 999
R-LOW <=> 000 to 999
G-LOW <=> 000 to 999
B-LOW <=> 000 to 999
ABL <=> 000 to 255
[2-7] PANEL FUNCTION (+) R-LEVEL <=> <=> LV-0 to LV-7 <=>
G-LEVEL <=> <=> LV-0 to LV-7 <=>
B-LEVEL <=> <=> LV-0 to LV-7 <=>
ADDRESS L1 <=> <=> PH0 to PH9 <=>
ADDRESS L3 <=> <=> PH0 to PH9<=> E
ADDRESS U1 <=> <=> PH0 to PH9 <=>
ADDRESS U4 <=> <=> PH0 to PH9<=>
STK MODE <=> OFF <=> MODE1 to MODE8 <=>
FULL BLACK <=> MODE1 <=> OFF
PANEL RX <=> 000 to 999
PANEL RY <=> 000 to 999
PANEL GX <=> 000 to 999
PANEL GY <=> 000 to 999
PANEL BX <=> 000 to 999
PANEL BY <=> 000 to 999
CLS R <=> 000 to 255 F
CLS G <=> 000 to 255
CLS B <=> 000 to 255
PDP-5020FD 115
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Large Item
Middle Item Variable / Adjustment Range Remarks
Small Item
6.2 [2] PANEL FACTORY (+)
[2-8] ETC. (+) BACKUP DATA <=> NO OPRT <=> TRANSFER/ERR
DIGITAL EEPROM <=> NO OPRT <=> DELETE/REPAIR
PD INFO. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR
SD INFO. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR
HR-MTR INFO. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR
PM/B1-B5 <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR
P COUNT INFO. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR
MAX TEMP. <=> NO OPRT <=> CLEAR
MIRROR <=> OFF <=> MODE1 to MODE3 <=>
B
CLS <=> OFF <=> ON
[2-9] RASTER MASK SETUP (+) MASK OFF
RST MASK 01 <=> <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 60P
••• <=> 72V <=> 75V1 <=> 75V2 <=>
RST MASK 25 <=>
[2-10] PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) MASK OFF
PTN MASK 01 <=> <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 60P
••• <=> 72V <=> 75V1 <=> 75V2 <=>
PTN MASK 49 <=>
[2-11] COMBI MASK SETUP (+) MASK OFF
CMB MASK 01 <=> <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 60P
••• <=> 72V <=> 75V1 <=> 75V2 <=>
CMB MASK 17 <=>
6.2 [3] OPTION
C [3-1] CH PRESET <=> DISABLE <=> ENABLE
[3-2] ANTENNA MODE <=> Exclusively used for
CABLE <=> AIR
production line
[3-3] AFT <=> DISABLE <=> ENABLE
[3-4] SYNC DET (+) for the technical analysis
[3-5] CTI (+) for the technical analysis
[3-6] CC (+) for the technical analysis
6.2 [4] INITIALIZE
[4-1] SIDE MASK LEVEL (+) SIDE MASK LEVEL <=>
[4-2] FINAL SETUP (+) DATA RESET <=> NO <=> YES
[4-3] DTB SERVICE MODE (+) MODE SHIFT <=> NO <=> YES for the technical analysis (*1)
[4-4] Wide XGA AUTO <=> DISABLE <=> ENABLE for the technical analysis
[4-5] AUTO ADJUSTMENT (+) AUTO ADJUST. <=> NO <=> YES
(*1): Exit the Service Factory Menu and enter the Digital Tuner Service menu.
D
116 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[7] INDICATIONS IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 I N F O R MA T I ON V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B
V ER S I O N ( 1 )
5 I / F – 0 7 A 0 1A Main-items
MA I N – 0 2 KF_ 1 =0 1K
MUL T I AGC 1 0 7 8 _A
PRS – 0 2 A 0 1A
P I C – 0 2 A
10 D TUNER – 0 2 K 0 1K
Subtitled-items
MOD U L E – 06A 0 1A
B
S EQ P R S – 03Y 0 1A
15 P AN E L I N FO XXXXXXXX
16
Main-item indications
20 25 30 35 40
V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B
1 2 3 4
1 Input function C
Input Functions OSD
VIDEO 1 to 7 VD 1 to 7
Terrestrial Wave (Analog) AIR
Cable (Analog) CBL
Terrestrial Wave (Digital) ARD
Cable (Digital) CBD
Home Media Gallery HMG
PC PC
2 SIG mode and Screen size

Note: See SIG-Mode Tables. (See next page.)
3 Color system and Signal type

Color System and Signal Type OSD
NTSC Composite input NTV
S-connector input NTS
Y/CB/CR CBR
E
Y/PB/PR PBR
RGB RGB
Digital Video signal DIG
4 Option (Destination, Panel Generation, etc.)

Options OSD
ELITE: PRO-151/111FD AHB
Regular: PDP-5020/6020FD ATB
F
PDP-5020FD 117
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
2 SIG Mode and Screen size (by User is displayed)

1st and 2nd characters : Resolution of the input signal
3rd and 4th characters : Refresh rate of the input signal
5th character : Selection of the screen size
g Input signal mode table for video signals (resolutions and V frequencies)
1st to 4th Character Signal Type Fv (Hz) Fh (kHz)
10 60 SDTV*525i 60.000 15.750
20 60 SDTV*525p 60.000 31.500
B 30 60 HDTV*1125i 60.000 33.750
40 60 HDTV*750p 60.000 45.000
50 24 HDTV*1125p 24.000 27.000
50 60 HDTV*1125p 60.000 67.500
Fv: Vertical Frequency, Fh: Horizontal Frequency
g Input signal mode table for PC signals (resolutions and V frequencies)

1st to 4th Character Signal Type Fv (Hz) Fh (kHz)
C1 70 720 x 400 70.087 31.469
C C2 60 640 x 480 59.940 31.469
C4 60 800 x 600 60.317 37.879
C6 60 1280 x 720 60.000 44.800
C7 60 1024 x 768 60.004 48.363
C9 60 1360 x 768 60.015 47.712
D6 60 1280 x 1024 60.000 64.000
Fv: Vertical Frequency, Fh: Horizontal Frequency
g Current selection of the screen size
D
5th Character GUI Notation VIDEO PC
0 DOT k −
1 4:3 k k
2 FULL k k
3 ZOOM k −
4 CINEMA k −
5 WIDE k −
9 WIDE1 k −
A WIDE2 k −
k: supported, −: unsupported
118 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
6.2 DETAILS OF FACTORY MENU
A
[1] INFORMATION
g Operation items
RS-232C
No. Function Content
Command
[1-1] VERSION (1) The Flash memory versions for each device are displayed. QS1
[1-2] VERSION (2) The Flash memory versions for each device are displayed. QSE
[1-3] MAIN NG The Shutdown NG information and Event Times in the MTB section are displayed. QNG
[1-4] TEMPERATURE The present temperature and the FAN rotating status are displayed. –
[1-5] HOUR METER The accumulation power ON count of the panel is displayed. – B

The status registers of HDMI receiver are displayed with hexadecimal. –
Display the signal information input to VDEC. –
[1-1] VERSION (1) C
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
V ER S I O N ( 1 )
5 I / F – 0 7 A 0 1A
MA I N – 0 2 KF_ 1 =0 1K
MUL T I AGC 1 0 7 8 –A
PRS – 0 2 A 0 1A
P I C – 0 2 A
10 D TUNER – 0 2 K 0 1K
MOD U L E – 06A 0 1A D
S EQ P R S – 03Y 0 1A
15 P AN E L I N FO XXXXXXXX
16
Display Example Display Example

Display Item Meaning
(Program) (Boot)
I/F I/F microcomputer -07A 01A
MAIN Main microcomputer -02KF_1 =01K
MULTI AGC AGC data of Multi processor 1078-A
MULTI PRS Program of Multi processor -02A 01A
E
MULTI PIC Picture quality data of Multi processor -02A
DTUNER Software program of the Digital tuner -02K 01K
MODULE Module microcomputer -06A 01A
SEQ PRS Program of Sequence processor -03Y 01A
PANEL INFO It displays the generation of the panel, inchage and the type of the panel.
For details on display values and settings, see "10: Panel Information" in "5.9 [1] QS1 (PANEL
STATUS)."
PDP-5020FD 119
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[1-2] VERSION (2)
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
V ER S I O N ( 2 )
5 D TB HARD 0 3 4 2
P A S S WO R D 1 2 3 4
10
15
16
Display Item Meaning Display Example

DTB HARD DTB Hardware Version 0342
PASSWORD User setting password 1234
120 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[1-3] MAIN NG
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
MA I N N G
MA I N S UB 0 0 15 1H2 1M
5
1 MA– I I C A V – SW 0 0 0 1 3 H0 3M
2 MA – 3 L I F 0 0 0 0 2 H5 2M
3 MA I N – –– – – – 0 0 0 0 1 H5 8M
4 TEMP 2 – –– – – – 0 0 0 0 0 H0 7M
10 5
6
7
B
8
15
16
MTB side's Shutdown NG information

Error Display: Error Display:
Cause of Shutdown
MAIN SUB
AUDIO Short-circuit of the speaker terminal or failure of audio amplifier.
AUDIO Short-circuit of the speaker terminal or failure signal of audio amplifier (MAIN)
C
OTW Short-circuit of the speaker terminal or failure signal of audio amplifier (IF)
MODULE ---- Serial communication error of Module microcomputer.

MA-3L 3-wire Serial Communication error of Main microcomputer.
IF Communication error of IF microcomputer
MULTI Main communication error of Multi Processor
MA-IIC IIC Communication error of Main microcomputer
FE1 Tuner 1
MSPMAP MSP/MAP
AV-SW AV Switch
RGB-SW RGB Switch D
VDEC Main VDEC
SDRAM VDEC - SDRAM
ADC AD/PLL
HDMI HDMI
US-MAP US-MAP
MAIN ---- Communication error of Main microcomputer

FAN FAN abnormal
FAN2 FAN2 abnormal stop
TEMP2 ---- Abnormally high temperature

DTUNER Failure in Digital Tuner E
PS/RST DTB Starting error

RETRY Communication error with DTB
DEVICE DTB device error
DE-FE DTB device error (Tuner 1)
DTVAPP DTB device error (Application)
DEMOD DTB device error (DEMOD)
RST-MA Abnormally in MTB power
M-DCDC Abnormally in ASIC power (DC-DC)
RELAY Power decrease of RELAY power
F
MA-EEP ---- Main EEPROM communication error
PDP-5020FD 121
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
• Clear the MAIN NG history
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 I N F O R MA T I ON V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – NT V – A HB
MA I N NG
B 10
15 CL EAR < => : NO

16
Operation:
• Even if [k] key or [l] key is pressed, {CLEAR <=> :YES} ⇔ {CLEAR <=> :NO} is repeated.
• Selecting <NO> then pressing the ENTER/SET key will return the screen to the next higher layer,
C
without doing anything.
• Selecting <YES> then holding the ENTER/SET key pressed for 5 seconds will clear the NG log data
that are managed in MTB then return the screen to the next higher layer.
122 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[1-4] TEMPERATURE
A present temperature and the FAN rotation are displayed.
If either [k] key or [l] key is pressed, the display data is refreshed.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
T E M P E R A T UR E
5 T E MP 1 : 10 4 . 3 ( F )
T E MP 2 : 10 4 . 3 ( F ) 1 0 2 3 ( A / D )
B
FAN1 : L OW
10
FAN2 : 128 ( D / A )
B– SENSOR : 10 23 ( A / D )
15
16

TEMP1 The temperature of the sensor on the panel side is displayed by the Fahrenheit (F). C
TEMP2 The temperature conversion display is done with 10 bit the A/D input value of IF microcomputer.
It is displayed by both the Fahrenheit (F) and 8 bit A/D value.
Note: When temperature (F) of the sensor becomes more than a specified temperature, the
shutdown start of processing.
FAN1 The value of the FAN rotating state is displayed.
STOP: stopped, LOW: slow speed, HIGH: high speed.
FAN2 The value of the rotation state of FAN is displayed.
During a rotation of FAN, 8bit D/A value output from IF microcomputer is displayed.
It is displayed with OFF during a stop.
B-SENSOR The value that indicated the degree of brightness input into an Room light sensor is displayed.
AD value when the output of the Room light sensor was input into IF microcomputer is displayed. D
PDP-5020FD 123
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[1-5] HOUR METER
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
H OU R M E T ER
5 PA NE L 0 0 15 1H 2 1M
PAN E L CO U N T / S E R I A L
10
P - C OUN T 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 5 T I ME S
SER I AL ABCD E F GH I J K L MN O
B
15
16
Display Item Meaning Display Example

PANEL HOUR METER of the panel 00151H 21M
P-COUNT Accumulation power ON count of the panel 00000095 TIMES
SERIAL Serial number of the product ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
• MTB HOUR METER

In HOUR METER screen on Factory Menu, press the [ENTER/SET] key, and then it moves to the screen to clear MTB
HOUR METER. (MTB HOUR METER is cleared only.)
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
D
MTB HO U R ME T ER
10
15 CL EAR < => : NO

16
E
Operation:
• Even if [k] key or [l] key is pressed, {CLEAR <=> :YES} ⇔ {CLEAR <=> :NO} is repeated.
• Selecting <NO> then pressing the ENTER/SET key will return the screen to the next higher layer,
without doing anything.
• Selecting <YES> then holding the ENTER/SET key pressed for 5 seconds will clear the HOUR METER
(HOUR METER while the MAIN NG screen is displaed) data that are managed in MTB then return the
screen to the next higher layer.
124 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 I N F O R MA T I ON V D 4 – 3 0 6 0 1 – D IG– AHB
H DM I S I G NA L I NFO 1
5 PWR 5 V : AC T I V E MOD E : H DM I
V S Y NC : AC T I V E B I ST : ––
CKD T : AC T I V E NVA L : 0 0 06 1 4 4
SCD T : AC T I V E C TSVAL : 0 0 7 4 2 5 0
DCR P T : AC T I V E AKSV : B7 0 3 6 1 F 71 4
10 AU T H : AC T I V E BKSV : 5 1 1 E F2 1 AC D
I T CN T : N O B
EX T CO L : x v Y CC 7 0 9
RGB QR : D E F AU L T
P I XDEP : 1 2 b i t
15
16
Displays the input signal information of HDMI terminal

PWR5V +5 V power detection (18 pin of HDMI terminal)
VSYNC VSYNC detection C
CKDT Clock detection
SCDT SYNC detection
DCRPT HDCP decryption status
AUTHEN HDCP authentication status
MODE HDMI mode status
BIST HDCP Key status (Always display it with "--".)
NVAL N value
CTSVAL CTS value
AKSV Shadow AKSV value
BKSV Shadow BKSV value
IT CNT IT content (AVI info)
EXTCOL Extension calorimetry (AVI info)
D
RGV QR RGB range (AVI info)
PIXDEP Number of pixel/bit
PDP-5020FD 125
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 I N F O R MA T I ON V D 4 – 3 0 6 0 1 – D I G– AHB
H DM I S I G NA L I NFO 2
5 H RES : 22 00 CO L S P : 42 2
V RES : 05 63 CO LME T : 70 9
H DE : 19 20 AS PEC T : 16 : 9
V DE : 05 40 AC T I V E :
I NTRL : I NT S a me a s p i c t
10 V PO L : PO S V FMT :
B H PO L : PO S 19 20x 1 0 8 0 i @6 0
AUD I O : 48 k P I X R P : 0 0
PCM SO URC E : P I ONE E R
20 b i t DVR - D T 9 0
15
16
Displays input signal status of HDMI terminal

H RES Number of horizontal pixels
V RES Number of vertical lines
C
H DE Number of effectively horizontal pixels
V DE Number of effectively vertical lines
INTRL Interlace (=INT) or progressive (=PRG)
V POL VSYNC polarity
H POL HSYNC polarity
AUDIO (first line) Sampling frequency. (ex. DVD: 48kHz, CD: 44.1kHz) *1
AUDIO (second line) Audio format PCM (PCM) or No PCM (no PCM)
AUDIO (third line) Quantization bit
COL SP Color space (AVI Info) 422 or 444 or RGB *2
COLMET Calorimetry (AVI Info)
ASPECT Aspect (AVI Info)
ACTIVE Active format (AVI Info)
D V FMT Video format (AVI Info)
PIX RP Pixel count
SOURCE (first line) Vendor name of the emission device
SOURCE (second line) Model name of the emission device
*1: Confirm if this item is displayed when the audio is not outputted.
*2: If may not match to the state of source devices when the color is abnormal.
Display of HDMI FACTORY and correspondence of resolution

Please confirm the following items when the picture doesn't come out.
Input FACTORY Display
Signal H RES V RES H DE V DE V FMT
E
480i (525i)@60 858 262 or 263 720 240 720x480i@60
480p (525p)@60 858 525 720 480 720x480p@60
1080i (1125i)@60 2200 562 or 563 1920 540 1920x1080i@60
720p (750p)@60 1650 750 1280 720 1280x720p@60
1080p (1125p)@60 2200 1125 1920 1080 1920x1080p@60
1080p (1125p)@24 2750 1125 1920 1080 1920x1080p@24
126 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
V DE C S I G NA L I NFO 1
5 MV DE C – 0 0 0 : 0 0 S V DE C – 4 0 0 : 0 0
– 0 0 1 : 0 0 – 4 0 1 : 0 0
– 0 9 4 : 0 0 – 4 9 4 : 0 0
– 0 9 5 : 0 0 – 4 9 5 : 0 0
– 0 9 6 : 0 0 – 4 9 6 : 0 0
10 – 0 9 8 : 0 0 – – – – : – –
– 1 B 5 : 0 0 – 5 B 5 : 0 0
– 1 B 6 : 0 0 – 5 B 6 : 0 0
B
– 1 B 7 : 0 0 – 5 B 7 : 0 0
15
16
Displays signal status that is input to VDEC.

Sub Address Sub Address
Device (Main screen) (Sub screen) Meaning
000h 400h Line system distinction result

001h 401h VTR distinction result
094h 494h Slot number
VDEC 095h 495h Color system distinction result C
096h 496h ACC coefficient
098h --- 3D YC flag
1B5h 5B5h MV detection 1

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
D
1 I N F O R MA T I ON V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – N TV – AHB
V DE C S I G NA L I NFO 2
5 MV DE C – 2 0 5 : 0 0 S V DE C – 6 0 5 : 0 0
– 2 0 8 : 0 0 – 6 0 8 : 0 0
– 2 0 B : 0 0 – 6 0 B : 0 0
– 2 0 C : 0 0 – 6 0 C : 0 0
– 2 0 D : 0 0 – 6 0 D : 0 0
10
15
E
16
Displays signal status that is input to VDEC.

Sub Address Sub Address
Device (Main screen) (Sub screen) Meaning
205h 605h CC detection 1

208h 608h CC detection 2
VDEC 20Bh 60Bh CC-CRI detection
20Ch 60Ch XDS content advisory 0
20Dh 60Dh XDS content advisory 1 F
PDP-5020FD 127
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2] PANEL FACTORY (+)
Operation Items
This is the menu screen for the adjustment of the panel. Data acquisition and value adjustment can be performed for
the following items:
No. Indication Description of functions

[2-1] PANEL INFORMATION Data, such as the version of the microcomputer of the panel, product serial number, and
statuses of EEPROM for adjustment values for the main unit and for backup, are
displayed.
[2-2] PANEL WORKS Operation data, such as accumulated pulse-meter count, accumulated hour-meter
B count, accumulated power-on count, and the temperature detected by the sensor, are
displayed.
[2-3] POWER DOWN The power-down history is displayed.
[2-4] SHUT DOWN The shutdown history of the panel section is displayed.
[2-5] PANEL-1 ADJ (+) Settings of the driving voltage and AM radio prevention can be performed.
[2-6] PANEL-2 ADJ (+) White balance and ABL (power consumption) for the panel can be set.
[2-7] PANEL FUNCTION (+) Setting of the panel-degradation correction-level and various functions are displayed.
[2-8] ETC. (+) Copying of backup data, clearing of various settings, and changing of settings for
functions for which setting data are not stored upon last update are performed.
C [2-9] RASTER MASK SETUP (+) The mask indication (RASTER) can be set and indicated.
[2-10] PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) The mask indication (PATTERN) can be set and indicated.
[2-11] COMBI MASK SETUP (+) The mask indication (COMBI) can be set and indicated.
128 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Details of indications in each layer
[2-1] PANEL INFORMATION
• Data, such as the version of the microcomputer of the panel, product serial number, and statuses of digital EEPROM for
storing the adjustment values and for backup EEPROM, are displayed. No other layers are nested below this layer, and
there are no adjustment items.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
1 P AN E L FAC T . I N 1 – 3 0 6 0 2 – RG B – J H B
g Key operation
AREA 1 P A N E L I N FO R MA T I ON
2 MO DU LE –0 1A 0 1A <DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL WORKS
5 3 – P RG –0 1A <UP> : Shifting to COMBI MASK SETUP
4 – DAT –0 1A
5 SEQ PRS –0 1Y 0 2A (+) B
6 – PRQ –0 1Y <L/R> : Updating displayed information
7 – P I C –0 1Y
10 8 – SEQ 52 0Y
9
A SER I AL __ _ _ __ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _
B D I G. EEP AD JU ST E D
C BA CK UP NO D A T A !
15 D
16 E
Contents of the Display item

MODULE : The version of data written in the Module microcomputer is indicated.
-PRG : The program version of the Module microcomputer is indicated.
C
-DAT : The data version of the Module microcomputer is indicated.
SEQ PRS : The version of data written in the Sequence LSI is indicated.
-PRG : The program version of the Sequence LSI is indicated.
-PIC : The Picture-data version of the Sequence LSI is indicated.
-SEQ : The sequence-data version of the Sequence LSI is indicated.
SERIAL : The serial number of the module is indicated.
DIG.EEP : The adjusted status of the EEPROM that is mounted on the DIGITAL Assy is indicated.
BACKUP : The adjusted status of the EEPROM for backup that is mounted on the SENSOR Assy is indicated.
[2-2] PANEL WORKS

• Data on operations, such as the accumulated pulse-meter counts, hour-meter count, power-on count, and temperature
detected by the sensor, are displayed. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items. D
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
1 P AN E L FAC T . I N 1 – 3 0 6 0 2 – R GB – J H B g Key operation
AREA 1 P A N E L W O R K S <DOWN> : Shifting to POWER DOWN
2 <UP> : Shifting to PANEL INFORMATION
5 3 PM– B 1 0 0 0 0 07 1 5 M <L/R> : Updating displayed information
4 PM– B 2 0 0 0 0 06 0 7 M
5 PM– B 3 0 0 0 0 08 5 2 M
6 PM– B 4 0 0 0 0 06 6 8 M
7 PM– B 5 0 0 0 0 07 3 3 M
10 8
9 HR–MTR 0 0 0 0 2 5H 2 0M
A P –COUN T 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 5 T I ME S
E
B T EM P 1 + 27 . 4 / + 70 . 8 Temperature unit is " °C (Centigrade) ".
C C LS – RGB 2 0 0 0 / 0 3 2 5 / 1 2 2 3 – OK
15 D
16 E

• PM-B1 to B5: The accumulated pulse-meter counts for the 5 blocks on the screen OSD
CLS Status Indication
are indicated. (the lowest-order digit represents millions of pulses.)
Function OFF -OFF
• HR-MTR: The hour-meter value (accumulated power-on hours) is indicated.
Color sensor module -NC
• P-COUNT: The accumulated power-on count is indicated. non connection
• TEMP1: The current panel temperature and the historical maximum temperature Data abnormality -INV
recorded in memory are indicated. The range of temperature indication is from Data normal -OK
-50.0 to +99.9. (The temperature unit is " °C (Centigrade) ".)
• CLS-RGB: Data obtained from the color sensor are displayed in the order R, G, Note: F
and B, with the status indication at the end. Turning ON the functions of the color sensor
can be performed in the ETC(+) layer.
PDP-5020FD 129
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2-3] POWER DOWN
• The power-down history is displayed. No other layers are nested below this layer.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
1 P AN E L FAC T . I N 1 – 3 0 6 0 2 – RGB– J H B g Key operation
AREA 1 P O W E R D O W N <DOWN> : Shifting to SHUT DOWN
2 1ST 2 ND 0 0 0 1 2 4H 2 3M <UP> : Shifting to PANEL WORKS
5 3
4 1 X – DCCC – – – – –– 0 0 0 1 2 4H 2 1M <L/R> : Updating displayed information
5 2 Y – SUS S CAN 0 0 0 1 1 5H 0 5M
6 3 SCAN – – – – –– 0 0 0 1 0 7H 5 3M
7 4 P OW E R S CAN 0 0 0 0 9 8H 4 7M
10 8 5 ADRS – – – – –– 0 0 0 0 5 1H 3 0M
B 9 6 SCN5V X – DCDC 0 0 0 0 2 2H 2 1M
A 7 Y – DCDC – – – – –– 0 0 0 0 0 0H 5 7M
B 8 H M
C
15 D
16 E

• The last most 8 power-down histories are displayed with the hour-meter values that indicate the hours when power-downs occurred.
• When power-down is confirmed, the factor is displayed as "1st", "2nd", according to the accuracy order.
• The power-down history is not recorded when the power-down occurred at the same place and same time.
C
<Causes of power-down and corresponding OSD indications>
Cause of power-down OSD Indication Cause of power-down OSD Indication
POWER SUPPLY Unit P-PWR ADDRESS Assy ADRS
SCAN Assy SCAN DC/DC converter for X drive X-DCDC
5 V power for SCAN SCN5V X-SUS X-SUS
DC/DC converter for Y drive Y-DCDC DIG-DCDC D-DCDC
Y-SUS Y-SUS Unknown UNKNOW
130 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[2-4] SHUT DOWN
• The shutdown history of panel section is displayed. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no
adjustment items.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
1 P AN E L FAC T . I N 1 – 3 0 6 0 2 – RGB – J H B g Key operation
AREA 1 S H U T D OW N <DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL-1 ADJ (+)
2 MA I N SUB 0 0 0 1 2 4H 2 3M
5 3
<UP> : Shifting to POWER DOWN
4 1 T MP – NG T MP – H 0 0 0 1 2 4H 2 1M <L/R> : Updating displayed information
5 2 SQ– L S I RTRY 0 0 0 1 1 5H 0 5M
6 3 MD – DE V DAC 0 0 0 1 0 7H 5 3M
7 4 SQ– L S I VER– HS 0 0 0 0 9 8H 4 7M
10 8 5 MD – DE V BACKUP 0 0 0 0 5 1H 3 0M B
9 6 SQ– L S I BUSY 0 0 0 0 1 2H 0 7M
A 7 H M
B 8 H M
C
15 D
16 E

• The shutdown history is displayed. The last most 8 shutdown histories are displayed with the hour-meter values
that indicate the hours when shutdowns occurred.
• When there is detail information when shutdown occurred, the possible defective part is displayed as Sub information.
• The shutdown history is not recorded when the shutdown occurred at the same place and same time.
C
<Cause of shutdown and corresponding OSD Indication >
Cause of shutdown (MAIN) Cause of shutdown (SUB)
Main cause OSD Indication Sub cause OSD Indication
SQ_LSI SQ_LSI Communication Error RTRY
Drive Stop SQNO
Busy BUSY
Version mismatching (H/S) VER-HS
Version mismatching (H/M) VER-HM
Version mismatching (H/I) VER-HI
Digital EEPROM EEPROM
MDU-DEVICE MD-DEV
Backup EEPROM BACKUP
D
DAC IC DAC
Abnormally in RST2 power supply RST2 − −
High temperature of the panel TMP-H
Abnormally in panel temperature TMP-NG
Low temperature of the panel TMP-L
PDP-5020FD 131
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2-5] PANEL-1 ADJ (+)
This is a page for settings for the driving voltage and AM radio countermeasures. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the
screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
On third line of the screen, the white balance, ABL table, and drive sequence in the current status are displayed.
(Items that have lower layers are the same.)
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
1 P AN E L FAC T . I N 1 – 3 0 6 0 2 – RGB – J H B g Key operation
<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL-2 ADJ (+)
AREA 1 [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ]
2 <UP> : Shifting to POWER DOWN
5 3 <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer
4
B 5
6
7
10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D P AN E L – 1 ADJ ( + )
16 E
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
C 1 P AN E L FAC T . I N 1 – 3 0 6 0 2 – RGB – J H B
g Key operation
AREA 1 P A N E L – 1 A D J [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to the next item
2
5 3
<UP> : Shifting to the previous item
4 <RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/
5 setting value
6
<LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the
7
10 8 adjustment/setting value
9 <VOL+> : Adding by 10 to the adjustment/
A setting value
B
C
<VOL-> : Subtracting by 10 from the
15 D VOL O F F S E T < => : 12 8 adjustment/setting value
D 16 E <SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting
value and shifting to the upper layer
When entered to this layer, panel white balance and the gamma setting become the default temporarily for setting
that is necessary for voltage adjustment. Turn off the noise option function.
132 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
<Next nested layer of PANEL-1 ADJ (+)>

Setting RS-232C
No. Item OSD Indication Variable Range Value Command Remarks
1 Vsus voltage VOL SUS <=> 000 to 255 Factory VSU

2 Vysnofs voltage VOL OFFSET <=> adjustment VOF
value
3 Vyprst voltage VOL RST P <=> VRP
4 Vxpofs1 voltage VOL XPOFS1 <=> VX1
5 Vxpofs2 voltage VOL XPOFS2 <=> VX2
6 Vyknofs1,2 voltage VOL YKNOFS1 D <=> V1F
B
7 Vyknofs3 voltage VOL YKNOFS3 D <=> V3F
8 Vyknofs4 voltage VOL YKNOFS4 D<=> V4F
9 Δ Vyknofs1,2/3/4 VOL YKNOFSA D<=> VYF
10 First reset (wedge width) RESET1ST_KSB <=> 112 to 144 128 R1K Factory use
11 Second reset (wedge width) RESET2ND_KSB <=> R2K item
12 1SF - Y sus tail (wedge width) YSTL_1SF_KSB <=> Y1K

13 1SF - Y sus tail (resonance down width) YSTL_1SF_HZ <=> Y1Z
14 3SF and later - first X sus (resonance up width) XSUS_1ST_B <=> X1B
15 2SF - second Y sus (resonance up width) YSUS_2ND_B <=> Y2B
16 2SF - third X sus (resonance up width) XSUS_3RD_B <=> X3B
C
17 2SF - repeat Y sus (resonance up width) YSUS_B <=> YSB
18 2SF - repeat X sus (resonance up width) XSUS_B <=> XSB
19 3SF and later - Y sus tail (wedge width) YSTL_KSB <=> YTK
20 3SF and later - Y sus tail (resonance down width) YSTL_HZ <=> YTZ
21 2SF - Y sus tail (wedge width) YSTL_2SF_KSB <=> Y2K
22 2SF - Y sus tail (resonance down width) YSTL_2SF_HZ <=> Y2Z
23 3SF and later (2 pulses of SSF) YSTL_FMR_KSB <=> YNK
- Y sus tail (wedge width)
24 Timing between Scan and Address SCAN ADRS ADJ <=> SAT
25 SUS frequency (AM radio anti-jamming) SUS FREQ <=> MODE1 to 8 MODE1 SFR Note
D
Note: It is necessary to turn OFF and ON the power for reflecting the setting change.
PDP-5020FD 133
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2-6] PANEL-2 ADJ (+)
• White balance of the panel can be adjusted. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer
below for item selection.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
1 P AN E L FAC T . I N 1 – 3 0 6 0 2 – RGB – J HB g Key operation
AREA 1 [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL FUNCTION (+)
2 <UP> : Shifting to PANEL-1 ADJ (+)
5 3
<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer
4
5
6
7
B 10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D P AN E L – 2 ADJ ( + )
16 E
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 P A N E L – 2 ADJ [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to the next item
2 <UP> : Shifting to the previous item
C
5 3 <RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/
4
setting value
5
6 <LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the
7 adjustment/setting value
10 8 <VOL+> : Adding by 10 to the adjustment/
9
A
setting value
B <VOL-> : Subtracting by 10 from the
C adjustment/setting value
15 D R –H I GH < => : 25 6 <SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting
16 E
<Next nested layer of PANEL-2 ADJ (+)>

D Setting RS-232C
No. Item OSD Indication Variable Range Value COMMAND Remarks
1 Panel WB R highlight R-HIGH <=> 000 to 999 Factory PRH

2 Panel WB G highlight G-HIGH <=> adjustment PGH
value
3 Panel WB B highlight B-HIGH <=> PBH
4 Panel WB R lowlight R-LOW <=> 000 to 999 PRL
5 Panel WB G lowlight G-LOW <=> PGL
6 Panel WB B lowlight B-LOW <=> PBL
7 ABL ABL <=> 000 to 255 ABL
The ABL/WB adjustment values are grouped into three tables with ABL and four tables with WB, depending on the drive sequences.
E The adjustment value for the actually driven table is displayed. The number of the adjustment table and the drive sequence currently
selected are displayed on the right side of the third line as the On-Screen display.
<ABL/WB adjustment table and Drive sequence>

OSD Drive Sequence OSD
ABL Table WB Table Indication Indication Remarks
TABLE 1 TABLE 1 A1W1 VIDEO-60Hz 60VS

PC-60Hz 60PS
TABLE 2 TABLE 2 A2W2 VIDEO-48Hz 48VS
VIDEO-50Hz 50VS
F TABLE 3 TABLE 3 A3W3 VIDEO-72Hz 72VS
VIDEO-75Hz-1 75V1
TABLE 4 A3W4 VIDEO-75Hz-2 75V2 Correspond to MASK indication only
134 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[2-7] PANEL FUNCTION (+)
• A level setting for panel degradation correction can be made. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next
nested layer below for item selection.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to ETC.(+)
2 <UP> : Shifting to PANEL-2 ADJ (+)
5 3 <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer
4
5
6
7
10 8 B
9
A
B
C
15 D P AN E L F UNC T I ON ( + )
16 E
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 P A N E L F UN C T I ON [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to the next item
2 <UP> : Shifting to the previous item
5 3
4
<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/
5 setting value C
7 adjustment/setting value
10 8
9
<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting
A value and shifting to the upper layer
B
C
15 D R–L EVEL < => : LV - 0
16 E
<Next nested layer of PANEL FUNCTION (+)>

Setting RS-232C
No. Item OSD Indication Variable Range Value COMMAND Remarks
1 R deterioration correction LEVEL R-LEVEL <=> Lv-10 to 7 Lv-3 RRL Factory use D
2 G deterioration correction LEVEL G-LEVEL <=> RGL item (Note)

Lv-2
3 B deterioration correction LEVEL B-LEVEL <=> Lv-0 RBL
4 L1 address ADDRESS L1 <=> PH0 to 9 PH1 AP0
5 L2 address ADDRESS L2 <=> PH3 AP0
8 U1 address ADDRESS U1 <=> PH1 AP2
E
12 Streaking correction STK MODE <=> OFF to MODE1 to 8 MODE1 SKM
13 Black display mode FULL BLACK <=> OFF to MODE1 MODE1 FBM
14 Panel Rx characteristic PANEL RX <=> 000 to 999 Factory PRX Factory use
15 Panel Ry characteristic PANEL RY <=> 000 to 999 adjustment PRY item
value
16 Panel Gx characteristic PANEL GX <=> 000 to 999 PGX
17 Panel Gy characteristic PANEL GY <=> 000 to 999 PGY
18 Panel Bx characteristic PANEL BX <=> 000 to 999 PBX
19 Panel By characteristic PANEL BY <=> 000 to 999 PBY
20 Color sensor R coefficient CLS R <=> 000 to 255 128 CSR
F
21 Color sensor G coefficient CLS G <=> 000 to 255 128 CSG
22 Color sensor B coefficient CLS B <=> 000 to 255 128 CSB
Note: It is necessary to turn OFF and ON the power for reflecting the setting change.
PDP-5020FD 135
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2-8] ETC. (+)
• Clearance of various log data for the panel and changing of settings for which setting data were not stored upon last
update can be performed.
Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to RASTER MASK SETUP
2 (+)
5 3 <UP> : Shifting to PANEL FUNCTION (+)
4
5
6
B 7
10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D E TC . ( + )
16 E
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 E T C . [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to the next item
2
<UP> : Shifting to the previous item
C 5 3
4
<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/
5 setting value
7
10
adjustment/setting value
8
9 <SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting
A value and shifting to the upper layer
B
C
15 D B AC K U P DATA < => : NO OPRT
16 E
D <Next nested layer of ETC (+)>

RS-232C
No. Item OSD Indication Processing Contents COMMAND Remarks
1 Backup EEPROM data BACKUP DATA <=> • NO OPRT (No operation) BCP
• TRANSFER (Backup data transmission)
2 Digital EEPROM data DIGITAL EEPROM <=> • NO OPRT (No operation) FAJ/UAJ
• REPAIR (Adjustment is complete)
• DELETE (Adjustment is not complete)
3 PD history PD INFO. <=> • NO OPRT (No operation) CPD
4 SD history SD INFO. <=> • CLEAR (Data clear) CSD
5 HOUR METER HR-MTR INFO. <=> CHM
E
6 Pulse meter PM/B1-B5 <=> CPM
7 PON counter P COUNT INFO. <=> CPC
8 Maximum temperature MAX TEMP. <=> CMT
9 Mirror reversing display MIRROR <=> • Mirror reversing display OFF MIR The indication
• MODE1 (Right and left reversing) on the menu is
• MODE2 (Top and bottom reversing) also highlighted.
• MODE3 (Right and left, Top and bottom The setting is
reversing) canceled upon
power-off.
10 Color sensor mode CLS <=> • Color sensor operation OFF CSF
• Color sensor operation ON
F
136 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[2-9] RASTER MASK SETUP (+)
• This menu set the RASTER MASK and the drive sequence at RASTER MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key
shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to PATTERN MASK SETUP
2 (+)
5 3 <UP> : Shifting to ETC. (+)
4
5
6
7 B
10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D RAS T ER MA S K SETUP ( + )
16 E
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 R A S T E R MA S K SETUP [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to the next MASK
2 <UP> : Shifting to the previous MASK
5 3 C
<RIGHT> : Changing MASK sequence (+)
4
5 <LEFT> : Changing MASK sequence (-)
7 value and shifting to the upper layer
10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D RST MA SK 01 : 60V
16 E
• The changed sequence and the ABL/WB table are retained until the mask is turned off.
D
<Next nested layer of RASTER MASK SETUP (+)>

RS-232C
No. Item OSD Indication MASK Display Sequence COMMAND Remarks
1 Mask off MASK OFF

2 Display raster mask 01 RST MASK 01 <=> <=>50V<=>60V<=>60P<=> MKR/VFQ
··· ··· 72V<=>75V1<=>75V2<=>
26 Display raster mask 25 RST MASK 25 <=>
PDP-5020FD 137
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[2-10] PATTERN MASK SETUP (+)
• This menu set the PATTERN MASK and the drive sequence at PATTERN MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key
shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to COMBI MASK SETUP (+)
2 <UP> : Shifting to RASTER MASK SETUP (+)
5 3
4
5
6
B 7
10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D PAT T ERN MA S K SETUP ( + )
16 E
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 P A T T E R N MA S K SETUP [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to the next MASK
C 5 3
4
7
10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D P TN MA SK 01 : 60V
16 E
D
<Next nested layer of PATTERN MASK SETUP (+)>

RS-232C
1 Mask off MASK OFF

2 Display raster mask 01 PTN MASK 01 <=> <=>50V<=>60V<=>60P<=> MKS/VFQ
··· ··· 72V<=>75V1<=>75V2<=>
50 Display raster mask 49 PTN MASK 49 <=>
138 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[2-11] COMBI MASK SETUP (+)
• This menu set the COMBI MASK and the drive sequence at COMBI MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts
the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL INFORMATION
2 <UP> : Shifting to PATTERN MASK SETUP
5 3
(+)
4
5 <SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer
6
7 B
10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D C OM B I MA S K SETUP ( + )
16 E
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
AREA 1 C O M B I MA SK SETUP [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] <DOWN> : Shifting to the next MASK
5 3 C
4
7
10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D C MB MA SK 01 : 60V
16 E
D
<Next nested layer of COMBI MASK SETUP (+)>

RS-232C
1 Mask off MASK OFF

2 Display raster mask 01 CMB MASK 01 <=> <=>50V<=>60V<=>60P<=> MKC/VFQ
··· ··· 72V<=>75V1<=>75V2<=>
18 Display raster mask 17 CMB MASK 17 <=>
PDP-5020FD 139
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A [3] OPTION
Operation item
No. Function Content RS-232C
[3-1] CH PRESET <=> Set the channel map for production line SCP
[3-2] ANTENNA MODE <=> Switch the CABLE/AIR of the analog tuner INJ
[3-3] AFT <=> Set AFT of the analog broadcasting AFT
[3-4] SYNC DET (+) Set the synchronized signal detection of VDEC −−−
[3-5] CTI (+) Set the synchronized signal detection of VDEC −−−
[3-6] CC (+) Set the ClosedCaption signal detection of VDEC −−−
B
[3-1] CH PRESET <=>

Exclusively used for production line.
[3-2] ANTENNA MODE <=>

C
[3-3] AFT <=>
[3-4] SYNC DET (+)

Exclusively used for technical analysis (details omitted).
[3-5] CTI (+)

D
[3-6] CC (+)
140 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[4] INITIALIZE
Operation item
No. Function Content RS-232C
[4-1] SIDE MASK LEVEL (+) Configure the color of the side mask. SML
[4-2] FINAL SETUP (+) Initialize flash memorys on virgin product status FST
[4-3] DTB SERVICE MODE (+) Enter the Digital Tuner Service Menu −−−
[4-4] Wide XGA AUTO <=> Exclusively used for technical analsyis. −−−
[4-5] AUTO ADJUSTMENT (+) Perform the auto-adjustment setting process −−−
[4-1] SIDE MASK LEVEL (+)

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 I N I T I AL I Z E V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B
I N
10 C
15 S I DE MAS K L E VE L ( + )
16
To configure sidemask level (To adjust the values, input signal is required).
Display Item Content RS-232C
SIDE MASK LEVEL <=> Adjust Side Mask level (Adjustable range: 000 to 255, Initial value: 115) SML
Note: In this mode (SIDE MASK LEVEL), adjustment value cannot changed with the VOLUME +/- keys.
D
PDP-5020FD 141
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
[4-2] FINAL SETUP (+)
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 I N I T I AL I Z E V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – NT V – AH B
F I NAL SETUP
10
B
15 DATA RES ET < => : NO

16
• To reset each memory values to factory default values. Factory command is "FST".
• When the configuration is set to <NO> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed, no action is taken and the menu returns to
previous screen.
• When the configuration is set to <YES> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed for 5 seconds, the reset action executes.
Be sure to disconnect and connect the AC cable after FINAL SETUP.
C
When replacing the MAIN Assy, the FINAL SETUP is required.
When the unit is turned on for the first time after Final Setup, the “Home”/“Retail” Mode Select screen is displayed.
Move the cursor to “Retail”, using the [i] or [j] key, then press the ENTER/SET key.
When “Retail” mode is selected, a confirmation screen shown below is displayed. Move the cursor to <Yes>,
using the [l] or [k] key, then press the ENTER/SET key.
142 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[4-3] DTB SERVICE MENU (+)
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 I N I T I AL I Z E V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – N T V– AHB
DTB S E RV I C E MO D E
10
15 MOD E SH I FT < => :YES

16
If the [ENTER/SET] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>,
shift to the DTB SERVICE mode screen. (Release from the SERVICE FACTORY mode.)
[4-4] WIDE XGA AUTO <=>

Exclusively used for technical analysis (details omitted). C
[4-5] AUTO ADJUSTMENT (+)

1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 I N I T I AL I Z E V D 1 – 1 0 6 0 1 – N T V– AHB
10
15 AUTO ADJ UST . < => :YES

16
• When the configuration is set to <NO> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed, no action is taken and the menu returns to
previous screen.
• When the configuration is set to <YES> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed for 5 seconds, the auto-adjustment
action executes. E
• Be sure to power off with the remote control unit or disconnect and connect the AC cable
after the auto-adjustment is completed.
• When replacing the IO Assy or MAIN Assy, the auto-adjustment is required.
PDP-5020FD 143
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
6.3 DIGITAL TUNER SERVICE MENU
A
The Digital Tuner Service Menu is provided for collecting data for technological examination when the Digital Tuner has any
problem in the market. This menu is introduced here just for reference.
[1] REMOTE CONTROL CODE IN DIGITAL TUNER SERVICE MENU

The following remote control cord is valid in the Digital Tuner Service Menu.
Remote Control Keys Basic Functions Remarks
j (DOWN) Selecting the menu items and Shifting downward to the next item. Moving to the next lower page.
shifting the pages.
i (UP) Shifting upward to the next item. Moving to the next upper page.
k (LEFT)
B Selecting the setting value. Modifying the setting of selected items.
l (RIGHT)
ENTER/SET Shifting to the next menu screen.
Shifting the menu layers
RETURN Shifting to the previous menu screen.
Numeric Keys Numeric input Input the numerical value.
POWER OFF Power OFF
Turning the power off.
STANDBY/ON
FACTORY Factory ON/OFF Release the Menu, then enter the Service Factory menu.
EXIT MENU exit
After you exit the menu, the channel that was selected on the menu will be
MUTING Muting displayed.
C
HOME MENU HOME MENU ON/OFF
[2] HIERARCHICAL TABLE OF DIGITAL TUNER SERVICE MENU

Item
Large Item Remarks
Middle Item
6.3 [3] Digital Tuner Service Menu
6.3 [4] HMG Service Menu
Exclusively used for technical analysis: HomeMediaGallery-related information indication
6.3 [5] Digital
D
Modulation Exclusively used for technical analysis
Frequency Exclusively used for technical analysis
Program Number Exclusively used for technical analysis
Audio PID Exclusively used for technical analysis
DTV Tuning Status Exclusively used for technical analysis: Terrestrial digital broadcasting-related information indication
6.3 [6] Software Version
Exclusively used for technical analysis: The software revision information that consists of it in DTB software
[3] DIGITAL TUNER SERVICE MENU SCREEN

E
Display a large item list of Digital Tuner Service Menu.
Select each item, and shift to each setting / information display
screen.
1 HomeMediaGallary-related information indication

(Derivative Model is not indicated.)
2 Terrestrial digital-related setting / information indication
3 Digital Tuner-related detailed software version indication
Fig.1 Digital Tuner Service Menu screen

F
144 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[4] HOME MEDIA GALLERY SCREEN
Display the HomeMediaGallary-related information.
Fig.2 Home Media Gallery screen
[5] DIGITAL SCREEN

Display the Digital broadcasting-related setting / information
indication.
1 The modulation method for receiving a digital broadcast can be

selected.
(QAM256/QAM64/VSB8) C
2 The frequency can be set (up to 2 digits after the decimal point).
3 Program Number in the same stream: Service ID can be selected.
4 Audio PID in the same stream: Audio PID can be selected.
5 The tuning status of a digital broadcast is displayed on a separate
screen.
Fig.3 Digital screen (North America)
The data displayed on the DTV Tuning Status screen are as shown below:
The instructions for servicing using this screen is shown in "Details on how to confirm the factory DTV tuning status" of section 5.2 [6].
Therefore, this screen is introduced here just for reference.
D
Fig.4 DTV Tunig Status screen
F
[6] SOFTWARE VERSION SCREEN
The details are not described here, as this is provided for technical examination.
PDP-5020FD 145
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
7. DISASSEMBLY
7.1 FLOWCHART OF REMOVAL ORDER
A
Note: Even if the unit shown in the photos and illustrations in this manual may differ from your product, the procedures
described here are common.
Flowchart of removal order for the main parts and boards

It is efficient to proceed with removal of the main parts and boards in the order shown in the chart below:
1 1
Side input cover Power button case

B
POWER SW
1
Rear case (509)
POWER FAN
SENSOR 50F Y DRIVE 50F X DRIVE PC
SUPPLY CONNECT
Side input shield

C
SIDE IO SIDE KEY SIDE HDMI

3
Under cover (509)
T panel U Assy
MAIN IO_AUDIO 50F DIGITAL

D 6
Front bezel
(509TVU)
LED RLS IR
7
F. Chassis HT Assy 50
F. Chassis HB 50 7
Sub frame L Assy (50)
Sub frame R Assy (50) 7
E
Address heatsink
S, L
50F 50F
ADDRESS L ADDRESS S
8
F. Chassis VL
Assy 50
50F SCAN A 50F SCAN B
146 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
7.2 DISASSEMBLY
A
Disassembly
Speaker System
1 Disconnect the speaker cables.
2 Remove the three screws. (in case of hung on wall unit use)
3 Remove the three screws. (in case of table top stand use)
4 Remove the speaker system.
5 Remove the three brackets by removing the six screws.
Bracket
5 ×2
Speaker cable
3 1
2 4
5 ×2
3 E
Bracket
2
5 ×2
Speaker system
3
Bracket
2
PDP-5020FD 147
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
Disassembly
1 Rear Case (509)

Power button case
Side input cover Screw tightening order
1 Remove the two screws. (ABA1379)
The other screws are random order.
2 Remove the power button case. 3 5 3
Side input cover

3 Remove the two screws. (ABA1378) 4 4 2 1
B 4 Remove the two screws. (ABA1377)
5 Remove the side input cover. Power button case
1 1
Reference 2 POWER SW Assy

Screw tightening order
2 1
C ABA1377 ABA1378
Rear case (509)
Rear case (509) 8 8 8 8 8

6 Remove the two screws. (ABA1380)
7 Remove the two screws. (ABA1379) 8 8 8 8
8 Remove the 25 screws. (ABA1377)
9 Remove the rear case (509).
8 8
D
6 7 8 8 7 6
9
8 8 8 8 8 8
8 8
8 8 8 8
E
Screw tightening order 1 2
148 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
2 Side Input Shield
1 Remove the two screws. (BMZ30P080FTB)
2 Remove the two screws. (BPZ30P080FTB)
4 Side input shield SIDE IO Assy SIDE HDMI Assy
3 3
3 Remove the four screws. (AMZ30P060FTB)
4 Remove the side input shield.
3 1 1 3
2 ×2
SIDE KEY Assy
NEVER use an electric screwdriver
for tightening this screw.
Tighten it manually.
B
2 1
3 Under Cover (509) D

2 Remove the under cover (509).
1 1 1 1 1
1 1
1 1 1
2 E
Under cover (509)

2 1 F
PDP-5020FD 149
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
4 T Panel U Assy
2 Remove the six screws. (BPZ30P080FTB)
1
1 1
3 Remove the two hexagon head screws. (ABA1382) 1
1 1
4 Remove the six screws. (BMZ30P060FTB)
5 Disconnect the one flexible cable.
6 Disconnect the three connectors. 6
7 Remove the T panel U Assy.
B
Do NOT pass the AC inlet jumper
wire through this wire saddle. PC Assy 5
AC inlet
1 1
3
GND Blue
1 3 1
4 ×6
7 2 ×6
C
AC inlet
T panel U Assy
D
How to remove the bridge connector
(1) Grip the two short edges of the connector with longnose
pliers.
(2) Insert a finger between the longnose pliers and the board MAIN Assy 50F DIGITAL Assy
to protect the board and the mounted parts on the board
from accidental damage by the pliers then, using your
finger as a fulcrum and the pliers as a lever, pry the
connector upward to remove it.
IO_AUDIO Assy MAIN Assy
F IO_AUDIO Assy
150 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Notes on Lead Dressing
The J101 and J102 cables require correct orientation for When removing the POWER SUPPLY Unit, be sure to
connection. Connect the connectors with white tape to the remove not only the POWER SUPPLY Unit but entire PCB
POWER SUPPLY Unit. base.
Tape (white) POWER SUPPLY Unit
B
POWER SUPPLY Unit
PCB base
J102
P2
J101
P1
C
Around the periphery of the Multibase, the J111 cable
wires (black and white) must be bound lastly then be
dressed so that they pass over other cables.
J111 (black and white) POWER SUPPLY Unit
P5
Dress so that J111 passes over other cables. Dress the J118 cable so that it passes over other cables.
Dress the J111 so that it passes under other cables.
The J215 cable must be passed over the J118 cable.
J215 J118 PC Assy
J118 Dress the J118 so that it passes E

over other cables.
PC1 How to remove the newly adopted wire saddle

from the chassis
IO6
2 Pull out
1
IO5 Push
F
Pass J215 over J118.
PDP-5020FD 151
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
5 Access to 50F DIGITAL Assy
Note:
When you remove whole Multibase Section, it is not
necessary to remove T panel U Assy.
1 1
1 Remove the six screws. (ABA1377)
2 Remove the four screws. (ABA1313)
B 3 Disconnect the two flexible cables.
2 2
Note on connection of the flexible cable
This flexible cables requires correct orientation for
connection. Connect the folded side of the cable to the 3
connector on the DIGITAL Assy, as shown in the photo
below. Reversely connecting the cable will damage 3
the Assy.
2
2
1 1
DIGITAL Assy
C 1 1
Folded side
T panel U Assy
Multibase Section
4 Lift the Multibase Section to the direction of the arrow.
F 50F DIGITAL Assy
152 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
6 Front Bezel (509TVU)
1 Remove the four rivets.
2 Pull the lower part of the front bezel (509TVU) 3
toward you and out. Front bezel (509TVU)
3 Remove the front bezel (509TVU), by pulling
it upward.
1 1 1 1
1 Front side
When assembling the front bezel,
Rivet tighten this rivet first.
Turn it not to press the rivet.
(Because when the rivet presses, fit in once again.)
LED Assy RLS Assy IR Assy
PDP-5020FD 153
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
7 Access to ADDRESS L and S Assys
F. Chassis HT Assy 50
1 Remove the two screws. (AMZ30P060FTB) 3 3
2 Remove the two screws. (ABZ30P080FTC)
3 Remove the two screws. (AMZ30P060FTB)
4 Remove the F. chassis HT Assy 50.
1 4
2 1 2
F. chassis HT Assy 50
B Screw tightening order 2 1

F. Chassis HB 50
1 Disconnect cables, connectors, as required. 4 4
5 2 5
Remove the F. chassis HB 50.
3 2 3
D F. chassis HB 50
Screw tightening order 2 1

154 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Sub frame L and R Assys

1 Disconnect cables, connectors, as required. Sub frame R Assy (50) Sub frame L Assy (50)
2 Remove the four screws. (TBZ40P060FTC)
2 2 2 2
Sub frame L Assy (50) Sub frame R Assy (50)

3 Remove the eight screws. (TBZ40P060FTC)
4 Remove the sub frame L and Assys. ×2 3 3 ×2 ×2 3 3 ×2
4 4

2 2
1 1
Address heatsink S , L 1 ×2
2 1 ×3
2 1 ×3
2 1 ×3
2
2 Remove the two address heatsinks S and
six address heatsinks L.
Address heatsink S Address heatsink L
1 ×2
2 1 ×3
2 1 ×3
2 1 ×3
2
Address heatsink S Address heatsink L F
PDP-5020FD 155
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
50F ADDRESS S Assy 50F ADDRESS L Assy
50F ADDRESS S Assy 50F ADDRESS L Assy
8 Access to SCAN A and B Assys

1 Remove the one screw. (APZ30P080FTB)
4 Remove the F. chassis VL Assy 50.
3 3
4 1 F. chassis VL Assy 50 2
2

The other screws are random order. 2 1
50F Y DRIVE Assy
50F SCAN A Assy 50F SCAN B Assy
156 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
7.3 PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS A
Be careful in handling this product, because scratches on cabinet coating are easily noticeable.
When working on this unit, be sure to place the cabinet on a piece of soft cloth for protection.
(1) Grille Assy - Reassembly

The Grille Assy is secured to the baffle plate with two-sided tape Remove the old two-sided tape attached to the rear side of the
and bosses. When removing the Grille Assy, it is necessary to Grille Assy and the front side of the baffle, and adhere new
wear cotton gloves. two-sided tape. Press the bosses into the baffle plate and press the
entire grill into position.
- Disassembly
1. Insert the tip of your gloved finger into the gap between the
Grille Assy in front and the corner of the baffle plate so that (2) Woofer (Disassembly) B
the Grille Assy is slightly lifted. The woofer is secured to the baffle plate with four screws from
the inside. To remove the woofer, first remove the baffle plate.
- Reassembly
When reassembling the woofer, place it so that its + terminal is
suitable for the inside. Tighten the screws to the baffle.
(3) Tweeter (Disassembly)

The tweeter is secured to the baffle plate with two screws from
2. Insert the gloved finger to the extent of the second joint into the inside. To remove the tweeter, first remove the baffle plate. C
the gap between the cabinet and the Grille Assy.
- Reassembly
When reassembling the tweeter, + terminal is in the topside.
Network Assy (Caution)

When removing the Network Assy, pull it out a little at a time
from alternate sides, because it is seated tightly.
2
3. Alternately and gradually lift the left and right sides of the
Grille Assy by about 5 cm, sliding gloved fingers along the 1
cabinet. When lifting the Grille Assy, be sure to lift the left and D
1 Input terminal
right sides alternately, but not both sides simultaneously.
Network Assy
Note: Be careful not to bend the Grille Assy too far.

Otherwise, it may be damaged. Baffle Assy (Caution) E
OK: Good example NG: Bad example When reassembling the cabinet and the baffle plate, secure the
screws in the order shown in the figure below:
Grille Assy
1 2 3 4 5 6
OK
Baffle
Grille Assy Front
NG F
Baffle
PDP-5020FD 157
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT
A
1. At shipment, the unit is adjusted to its best conditions. Normally, it is not necessary to readjust even if an assembly is replaced. If the
adjustment is shifted or if it becomes necessary to readjust because of part replacement, etc., perform the adjustment as described below.
2. Any value changed in Service/Factory mode will be stored in memory as soon as it is changed. Before readjustment, take note of the
original values for reference in case you need to restore the original settings.
3. Use a stable AC power supply.
8.1 ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED WHEN THE UNIT IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED
B When any of the following assemblies is replaced
POWER SUPPLY Unit Refer to “8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA” .
Writing of backup data is required.

DIGITAL Assy Refer to the “8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM
(DIGITAL ASSY)”.
X DRIVE Assy No adjustment required
C
Y DRIVE Assy No adjustment required
Refer to “8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA” and

Service Panel Assy “8.4 ADJUSTMENTS WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL
ASSY IS REPLACED”.
MAIN Assy (*) Execute section [4-5] AUTO ADJUSTMENT of

6.2 [4] INITIALIZE.
Execute section [4-5] AUTO ADJUSTMENT of

IO AUDIO Assy
6.2 [4] INITIALIZE.
D
No adjustment required
PANEL SENSOR Assy Backup data are automatically copied during the next
power-off.
Other assemblies No adjustment required
(*) : When replacing the MAIN Assy, be sure to perform the FINAL SETUP.
158 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
When any of the following assemblies is repaired
Notes on replacing parts
For the parts described in the list below, replacement is required for the whole Assy, not only the defective part.
If any part listed below is identified as defective and needs replacement, replace the whole Assy, and make necessary
adjustments after replacement.
Parts that Require Whole-Assy Replacement

PCB Assy No. Assy Name
Ref No. Function Name Part No.
IC5002 EEPROM BR24L02FV-W
IC5004 EEPROM BR24L02FV-W B
AWV2554 MAIN Assy
IC6001 System IC BCM7404XKPB11G
IC7004 EEPROM BR24L64F-W
IC6201 DDR SDRAM EDD5116AFTA-5B-E
IC6403 Flash ROM AGC1082
IC6811 Flash UCOM AGC1072 C

AWW2543 DIGITAL Assy
IC3601 Flash UCOM AGC1070
AWW1359 PC Assy IC8802 EEPROM BR24L01AFJ-W
AWV2546 X DRIVE Assy • Parts of X D-D CON BLOCK
• Parts of Y VF D-D CON BLOCK 1

AWV2547 Y DRIVE Assy • Parts of Y MAIN D-D CON BLOCK 1
• Parts of Y MAIN D-D CON BLOCK 2
D
Reason: The whole Assy must be replaced, because adjustments and data rewriting for the Assy at the level of production
line are required.
For the parts described in the table below, replacement of individual parts is difficult, because a heat pad is provided under
the bottom of the ICs.
Parts that Require Whole-Assy Replacement
PCB Assy No. Assy Name
Ref No. Function Name Part No.
IC4501 DC/DC Converter LTC3407EMSE-2
AWV2554 MAIN Assy IC4901 HDMI Rx SII9125CTU
E
IC5501 Demodulator MN884350
AWW1352 IO AUDIO Assy IC8401 Digital Amp TAS5122DCA
PDP-5020FD 159
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
The assembly must be replaced as a unit, and no
POWER SUPPLY Unit
part replacement is allowed.
No adjustment is required after replacement of parts

MAIN Assy other than those shown in “8.7 ADJUSTMENT WHEN
THE MAIN OR IO_AUDIO ASSY IS REPLACED.

IO AUDIO Assy other than those shown in “8.7 ADJUSTMENT WHEN
THE MAIN OR IO_AUDIO ASSY IS REPLACED.
B
DIGITAL Assy No adjustment required

X DRIVE Assy other than those shown in “8.5 ADJUSTMENT
WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED.
Y DRIVE Assy other than those shown in “8.5 ADJUSTMENT
WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED.
ADDRESS Assy No adjustment required

C
PANEL SENSOR Assy No adjustment required
Other assemblies No adjustment required
160 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY)
A
Outline
Adjustment data are stored in the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy in the production process. Those adjustment data are also
automatically stored in the EEPROM (for backup) on the PANEL SENSOR Assy.
If the DIGITAL Assy is replaced, those adjustment data for backup can be copied from the EEPROM on the PANEL SENSOR
Assy to a new DIGITAL Assy.
Backed up data
• Drive voltage adjustment value • Pulse-meter count
• Panel white balance adjustment value • P-ON counter value
• Drive waveform adjustment value • Serial No.
• Hour-meter count • PD/SD histories B
How to copy backup data

1. When the DIGITAL Assy is replaced with one for service (usual service)
Immediately after the DIGITAL Assy is replaced, the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy is in the status "adjustment not
completed," and the EEPROM for backup on the PANEL SENSOR Assy is in the status "adjustment completed." The LED on
the main unit warns you that the adjustment data in the EEPROM for backup have not been copied to the EEPROM on the
DIGITAL Assy, by lighting the red LED and flashing the blue LED. In such a case, the adjustment data for backup can be used
by copying the data to the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy, with the following procedures:
C
(1) Copying, using the Factory menu
1 Turn on the power.
2 Enter the Panel Factory mode.
3 Display the PANEL INFORMATION page, then check if "NO DATA!" is set for "DIG. EEP" and "ADJUSTED" is set for
"BACKUP".
4 Copy the backup data, as shown in the figure below.
PANEL INFORMATION
Key Down 7th
ETC. (+) D
SET
BACKUP DATA : NO OPRT
Right
BACKUP DATA : TRANSFER
SET (5 sec)
5 Check if "ADJUSTED" is set for "DIG. EEP" on the PANEL INFORMATION page. E
6 Turn off the power.
(2) Copying, using the RS-232C commands

2 Issue the FAY command.
3 With the QS2 command, confirm that the main unit adjustment flag is "adjustment not completed" and that the adjustment
backup flag is "adjustment completed."
4 Issue the BCP command to transfer the data stored in the EEPROM for backup.
5 With the QS2 command, confirm that the main unit adjustment flag becomes "adjustment completed."
Note: If both the DIGITAL and PANEL SENSOR Assys are to be replaced, replace the PANEL SENSOR Assy first in order to F
store the backup data. Then turn the unit on then back off again, then replace the DIGITAL Assy.
PDP-5020FD 161
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
2. When manual adjustment is required after the DIGITAL Assy is replaced with one
for service
If backup data cannot be transferred to the DIGITAL Assy because of defective parts, etc., after the DIGITAL Assy is replaced
and manual adjustment is performed, those manually adjusted data can be registered as adjusted data with the following
procedures. Once the data on the DIGITAL Assy are registered as adjusted data, the adjustment data for backup will be
automatically updated each time the unit is turned off. Therefore, if a DIGITAL Assy with adjusted data is mounted on the unit,
the following procedures are not required, even after manual adjustment.

B
3 Display the PANEL INFORMATION page, then check if "NO DATA!" is set for "DIG. EEP".
4 Register the changed adjustment data as adjusted data, as described for the following procedures, then transfer them as
backup data.
PANEL INFORMATION
Key Down 7th
ETC. (+)
C SET
Key Down
DIGITAL EEPROM : NO OPRT
Right
DIGITAL EEPROM : REPAIR
D SET (5 sec)
5 Check if "ADJUSTED" is set for "DIG. EEP" on the PANEL INFORMATION page.

3 With the QS2 command, confirm that the main unit adjustment flag is "adjustment not completed."
4 Issue the FAJ command to register the changed adjustment data as adjusted data then transfer them as backup data.
5 With the QS2 command, confirm that the main unit adjustment flag becomes "adjustment completed."
E 6 Turn off the power.
162 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
3. When a secondhand DIGITAL Assy is to be reused
A DIGITAL Assy in good condition that had been mounted in another product can be reused. Before reuse, by following the
procedures described below, make the data in the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy "adjustment not completed" data in order to
prevent accidental updating of backup data when the secondhand DIGITAL Assy is mounted in another product

3 Display the PANEL INFORMATION page, then check if "ADJUSTED" is set for "DIG. EEP". B
4 Make the data in the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy "adjustment not completed" data, by following the procedures below:
PANEL INFORMATION
Key Down 7th
ETC. (+)
SET

C
Key Down
Right
DIGITAL EEPROM : DELETE
SET (5 sec)
5 Check if "NO DATA!" is set for "DIG. EEP" on the PANEL INFORMATION page. D

3 With the QS2 command, confirm that the main unit adjustment flag is "adjustment completed."
4 Issue the UAJ command to make the data in the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy "adjustment not completed" data.
5 With the QS2 command, confirm that the main unit adjustment flag becomes "adjustment not completed."
Note: If you mount a secondhand Assy to the product without performing the above procedures, the adjustment data and E
logs for the main unit specific to the product will be erased, and those of the secondhand Assy will be copied when the
unit is turned off.
PDP-5020FD 163
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA
A
Clearance of various logs after the Assys are replaced
Besides adjustment data, data on accumulated power-on time and logs on defective parts of the product are backed up.
Some of those data must be cleared after the Assys are replaced for service.
Clearance of those data can be performed in the ETC layer of the Factory menu or with RS232C commands.
Clearing at the Replacement Clearing method

Item Content POWER SUPPLY Factory Menu RS-232C
Panel Other parts (ETC layer) Commands
Unit
No need to be No need to be
Hour-meter Accumulated power-on time Must be cleared cleared cleared HR-MTR INFO. CHM
Accumulated number of pulses emitted Must be cleared No need to be No need to be

Pulse-meter (mandatory) cleared cleared PM/B1-B5 CPM
B
Shutdown history Causes and hour-meter values for the No need to be No need to be
of the panel last eight shutdowns (SD) of the Panel Must be cleared cleared cleared SD INFO. CSD
Causes and hour-meter values for the last No need to be No need to be

Power-down history eight power-downs (PDs) of the Panel Must be cleared cleared cleared PD INFO. CPD
No need to be Must be cleared No need to be

Power-on counter Relay-on count cleared (mandatory) cleared P COUNT INFO. CPC
Historical max. temperature of the

MAX TEMP panel Must be cleared Must be cleared Must be cleared MAX TEMP. CMT
Notes: • As the pulse-meter count is used for each correction function, the log must be cleared when the panel is replaced.
• After you clear the log, the unit must be turned off then back on again to reflect the cleared data for each correction
C function. If any adjustment is required after clearing the log, be sure to turn the unit off then back on again before
adjustment.
(1) Clearance of logs, using the Factory menu

3 Clear the various logs, as shown in the figure below.
Note: The following example shows how to clear the PD log (PD INFO.). To clear other items, select each item you wish to
clear then perform the same procedures.
PANEL INFORMATION
D
Key Down 7th
ETC. (+)
SET
Key Down

E Key Down
Key Down
PD INFO. < = > : NO OPRT Right PD INFO. < = > : CLEAR SET (5 sec)
(2) Using the RS-232C commands

F 2 Issue the FAY command.
3 Issue the Delete command for a log you wish to clear.
164 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
8.4 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED
After the panel is replaced with one for service, voltage margin adjustment is required.
[Preparation]
Basically, voltage margin adjustment is performed using the Panel Factory menu.
After the panel is replaced and the unit is turned on, clear the pulse meter first.
For details on how to clear the pulse meter, see "8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA".
∗1: As various corrections are made referring to the pulse-meter count to calculate how long the panel has been used, if
adjustment of the panel for service is performed without clearing the pulse-meter count, proper adjustments will not be B
performed.
∗2: The drive sequence for Video 60-Hz is used for adjustment. When adjustment is made using the Panel Factory menu, the
current drive sequence is displayed on the screen, as shown in the figure below. Make sure that 60VS is always indicated
during adjustment.
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
1 P AN E L FAC T . I N 1 – 3 0 6 0 2 – RG B – J H B
1 P AN E L – 1 A D J [ A 1W1 / 6 0 V S ] Drive sequence indication

2
5 3
4 C
5
6
7
10 8
9
A
B
C
15 D VOL O F F S E T < => : 12 8
16 E
Example of the On-Screen display during Panel Factory mode
[Supplement]
In the "PANEL-1ADJ" layer, the Panel White Balance value is reset to default, Panel Gamma is set to Straight, Noise is set to
OFF, LUT mode is set to ON and Reset active control is set to OFF.
If adjustment is performed using RS232C commands, unlike the case of Factory menu operation, adjustments are not
interlocked. Therefore, settings must be performed individually, by issuing commands. (See the section on preparations before
adjustment.)
PDP-5020FD 165
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
Overview Range of margin measuring
Recovery flowchart (1-1)
Preparation Checking VOL OFFSET (min) NG Read the voltage within the hysteresis (stricter value).
(RST MASK 09: Pink) V Adjustment
Erroneous discharge
value m+1
Clearing of the hour meter and pulse meter OK
Aging with CMB MASK 01 (moving ramp) Adjustment
Checking VOL OFFSET (max) NG value m
displayed (RST MASK 18: Red 626)
Read the voltage No erroneous
OK within this range. discharge
Checking VOL OFFSET (max) NG Adjustment
(RST MASK 19: Green 626) value n
Main flowchart (1) OK Adjustment
NG Erroneous discharge value n-1
Checking VOL OFFSET (max)
NG (RST MASK 20: Blue 626)
Checking VOL OFFSET (min)
B (RST MASK 09: Pink) OK
OK
Definition of limits for the voltage margins
Checking VOL OFFSET (max) NG Recovery flowchart (1-2) (abnormal lit/dead cells)
(RST MASK 18: Red 626) Checking VOL OFFSET (min) NG
(RST MASK 18: Red 626)
Abnormal lit cells:
OK • Five or fewer abnormal cells on the whole screen
OK
• Two or fewer abnormal cells within a radius of 1 cm
Checking VOL OFFSET (max) NG
(RST MASK 19: Green 626) Recovery flowchart (1-3) Abnormal dead cells
OK Checking VOL OFFSET (max) NG • Fifteen or fewer abnormal cells on the whole screen
NG (RST MASK 19: Green 626) • Two or fewer abnormal cells within a radius of 1 cm
Checking VOL OFFSET (max)
OK
(RST MASK 20: Blue 626)
∗: Abnormal cells visually recognizable at a distance of
OK 1 meter from the panel must be counted.
C Recovery flowchart (1-4)
∗: Cells displayed abnormally for less than one second
Checking VOL OFFSET (max) NG are not counted as abnormal cells.
(RST MASK 20: Blue 626)
OK
Checking VOL OFFSET (min) NG
(RST MASK 09: Pink)
OK
Main flowchart (2)

Definition of tones for the measuring
Recovery flowchart (2-1)
signals
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (min) NG
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (min) NG (RST MASK 21: Red 1023+) FHD signal (1920*1080)/Video 60-Hz sequence
(RST MASK 21: Red 1023+) OK /Dither: ON, L dither: ON, noise: OFF
OK Pink
D RST MASK 09 (R 1023 /G 626 /B 1023)
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (min) NG Recovery flowchart (2-2) Cyan 120 RST MASK 14 (R 0 /G 120 /B 120)
(RST MASK 22: Green 1023+) NG
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (min) Red 626 RST MASK 18 (R 626 /G 0 /B 0)
OK (RST MASK 22: Green 1023+) Green 626 RST MASK 19 (R 0 /G 626 /B 0)
OK
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (min) NG Blue 626 RST MASK 20 (R 0 /G 0 /B 626)
(RST MASK 23: Blue 1023+) Red 1023+ RST MASK 21 (R 1023 /G 120 /B 120)
OK Recovery flowchart (2-3) Green 1023+ RST MASK 22 (R 120 /G 1023 /B 120)
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (max) NG Checking VOL YNOFSA D (min) NG Blue 1023+ RST MASK 23 (R 120 /G 120 /B 1023)
(RST MASK 14: Cyan 120) (RST MASK 23: Blue 1023+)
OK
OK
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (max) NG
(RST MASK 14: Cyan 120) Interlocked settings for Voltages Vyknofs1/3/4
OK For the 9th-generation PDPs, interlocked setting for
E Voltages Vyknofs1/3/4 is available on the Factory menu or
with RS232C commands, for easier adjustment. Therefore,
Recovery flowchart (2-4) in the adjustment flowchart, the interlocked setting function
is used. (Individual setting for each adjustment value is
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (max) NG also possible, as in the conventional setting methods.
(RST MASK 14: Cyan 120)
OK Set Voltage Factory Menu Command
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (min) NG Vyknofs1 individual VOL YNOFS1 D [V1F]
(RST MASK 21: Red 1023+) Vyknofs3 individual VOL YNOFS3 D [V3F]
Adjustment completed OK
Vyknofs4 individual VOL YNOFS4 D [V4F]
Checking VOL YNOFSA D (min) NG
(RST MASK 22: Green 1023+) Vyknofs1,3,4 interlocked VOL YNOFSA D [VYF]
OK Note:
Replacement with the parts Checking VOL YNOFSA D (min) NG • The initial value for the interlocked setting value is 128,
for service (RST MASK 23: Blue 1023+) including for factory preset values.
F
• Re-replacement of the panel OK • See "[3] DRIVE ASSY" of "5.2 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART
• Replacement of the DRIVE Assy OF FAILURE ANALYSIS" for calculation of actually used
voltage values.
166 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Preparation before adjustment
[Replacement with the panel for service is completed.]
Procedures for resetting
corrections for change
over time
Turn the unit on. / [PON]
Enter Factory mode. / [FAY]
Set PM/B1-B5 to CLEAR (to clear the pulse meter). / [CPM] B
Set HR-MTR to CLEAR (to clear the hour meter). / [CHM]
Turn the unit off. / [POF]

∗ To reflect the results of log clearing for each correction function,
the unit must be turned off then back on again. Before adjust-
Procedures for stabilizing the ment, be sure to turn the unit off then back on again.
panel before adjustment
Turn the unit on. / [PON]
C
Enter Factory mode. / [FAY]
Indication example of the adjustment label

Enter the tentative setting value of the replacement panel of service panel
Setting Item Tentative Setting Value
VOL SUS / [VSU ∗∗∗] 128
AWU1340 Data VOF=129
VOL OFFSET / [VOF ∗∗∗] VOF indication value VRP=031 V1F=143 V3F=128+α
VOL RST P / [VRP ∗∗∗] VRP indication value
V4F=172 Hour Meter_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ H
VOL XPOFS1 / [VX1 ∗∗∗] 085
VOL XPOFS2 / [VX2 ∗∗∗] 047 Data 08/02/28 Chassis CXX99999
VOL YNOFS1 D / [V1F ∗∗∗] V1F indication value Time 18:27 Pnl FD4A0808100123
VOL YNOFS3 D / [V3F ∗∗∗] V3F indication value +0
D
VOL YNOFS4 D / [V4F ∗∗∗] V4F indication value
Note: The symbol "α" denotes the adjustment value plus 0.
VOL YNOFSA D / [VYF ∗∗∗] 128
∗ Each setting value described on the adjustment label
Note: "+0" shows α. denotes an indicated data value but not a real voltage value.
Therefore, just enter the data value as a setting value.
Display CMB MASK 01 (moving ramp). / [MKC S01]
∗ To store the VFQ S03 command in memory, transmit it after

Select Video 60-Hz sequence. / [VFQ S03] displaying the mask.
Perform aging for 30 minutes.
E
[To the Main flowchart (1)]
Note:
* When you perform the adjustment with RS232C commands, issue the following commands in addition.
* If the unit is shut down in the middle of performing the adjustment flowchart, reissuing of the command is required.
[PAV S00] : To set panel drive mode to Factory

[VFQ S03] : To set Drive Sequence to Video 60-Hz
[WBI S01] : To temporarily reset the Panel WB adjustment value to default (WBI S00 cancels this setting.)
[PGR S00] : To set the gamma R value to that for Factory mode
[PGG S00] : To set the gamma G value to that for Factory mode
[PGB S00] : To set the gamma B value to that for Factory mode F
[DIZ S03] : Dither ON, L dither ON, noise OFF.
[$1800000001] : LUT mode ON
PDP-5020FD 167
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
Main flowchart (1)...Checking VOL OFFSET
[From Preparation]
Display RST MASK 09 (Pink). / [MKR S09]
Set VOL OFFSET to the tentative setting value minus 50. / [VOF ∗∗∗]
Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)? Yes

To the Recovery flowchart (1-1)
(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.)
No
Display RST MASK 18 (Red 626). / [MKR S18]
Set VOL OFFSET to the tentative setting value plus 56. / [VOF ∗∗∗]
Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? Yes

No
Display RST MASK 19 (Green 626). / [MKR S19]

D To the Recovery flowchart (1-3)
No
Display RST MASK 20 (Blue 626). / [MKR S20]

No
E
Return VOL OFFSET to the tentative setting value. / [VOF ∗∗∗]
Determine the tentative setting value for VOL OFFSET as

the final value.
From the Recovery flowchart (1-1) and (1-4)

F
168 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Main flowchart (2)...Checking VOL YNOFSA D
[From the Main flowchart (1)]
Display RST MASK 21 (Red 1023+). / [MKR S21]
Set VOL YNOFSA D to the tentative setting value 105. / [VYF 105]
Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? Yes B

No
Display RST MASK 22 (Green 1023+). / [MKR S22]

No
C
Display RST MASK 23 (Blue 1023+). / [MKR S23]

No
Display RST MASK 14 (Cyan 120). / [MKR S14]
Set VOL YNOFSA D to the tentative setting value 162. / [VYF 162]
D
Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)? Yes

No
Return the VOL YNOFSA D to the tentative setting value 128. / [VYF 128]
Determine the tentative setting value for VOL YNOFSA D as the final value.
E
From the Recovery flowchart (2-3) and (2-4)
[Adjustment completed]
Note:
Make sure that the following values become the final setting values.
VOL SUS *1 VOL XPOSF2 *1
VOL OFFSET VOL YNOFS1 D *1
VOL RST P *1 VOL YNOFS3 D *1
VOL XPOFS1 *1 VOL YNOFS4 D *1
F
VOL YNOFS4 A
*1: The tentative setting value becomes the final value.
PDP-5020FD 169
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
Recovery flowchart (1-1)...Changing the VOL OFFSET setting
RST MASK 09 (Pink)
Gradually increase the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the

discharge (lit cell).
The VOL OFFSET value must be 101 or less.
B
Yes Replacement of abnormal circuits or

Current VOL OFFSET > 096?
re-replacement of the panel required
No
Display RST MASK 18 (Red 626). / [MKR S18]
Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value plus 106. / [VOF ∗∗∗]
C
Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead cell)? Yes Replacement of abnormal circuits or
(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) re-replacement of the panel required
No
D
No
E
No
Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value minus 56. / [VOF ∗∗∗]
Determine the current VOL OFFSET setting value as the final value.
170 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
[From the Main flowchart (1) ]
RST MASK 18 (Red 626)
Gradually decrease the VOL OFFSET value until disappear the

discharge (dead cell).
The VOL OFFSET value must be 152 or greater.
B

Current VOL OFFSET < 157?
No
C
[To the Recovery flowchart (1-3)]
[From the Main flowchart (1) / Recovery flowchart (1-2)]
D
RST MASK 19 (Green 626)


E
No
PDP-5020FD 171
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
RST MASK 20 (Blue 626)

B

No
Display RST MASK 09 (Pink). / [MKR S09]
Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value minus 106. / [VOF ∗∗∗]
C
Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)? Yes Replacement of abnormal circuits or
No
Set VOL OFFSET to the current setting value plus 50. / [VOF ∗∗∗]
D Determine the current VOL OFFSET setting value as the final value.
172 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
Recovery flowchart (2-1)...Changing the VOL YNOFSA D setting
RST MASK 21 (Red 1023+)
Gradually increase the VOL YNOFSA D value until disappear the

The tentative setting value of VOL YNOFS3 D + current setting
value of VOL YNOFSA D must be 255 or less.
B
Tentative setting value of VOL YNOFS3 D Yes Replacement of abnormal circuits or

+ current setting value of VOL YNOFSA D re-replacement of the panel required
> 254?
No

RST MASK 22 (Green 1023+)
D

> 254?
No
Display RST MASK 23 (Blue 1023+). / [MKR S23] E
[To the Main flowchart (2-3)]
PDP-5020FD 173
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
RST MASK 23 (Blue 1023+)

B

> 254?
No
Display RST MASK 14 (Cyan 120). / [MKR S14]
Set VOL YNOFSA D to the current setting value plus 57. / [VYF ∗∗∗]
Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal lit cell)? Yes Replacement of abnormal circuits or
No
Set VOL YNOFSA D to the current setting value minus 34. / [VYF ∗∗∗]
Determine the current VOL YNOFSA D setting value as the final value.
D [To the Main flowchart (2)]
174 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
RST MASK 14 (Cyan 120)
Gradually decrease the VOL YNOFSA D value until disappear the

discharge (lit cell).
value of VOL YNOFSA D must be 266 or greater.
B

< 268?
No
Display RST MASK 21 (Red 1023+). / [MKR S21]
Set VOL YNOFSA D to the current setting value minus 57. / [VYF ∗∗∗]
No
(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.) re-replacement of the panel required D
No
Display RST MASK 23 (Blue 1023+). / [MKR S23]
No
E
Set VOL YNOFSA D to the current setting value plus 23. / [VYF ∗∗∗]
Determine the current VOL YNOFSA D setting value as the final value.
PDP-5020FD 175
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
8.5 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED
A
Waveform adjustments required when replacing the following parts of the X DRIVE and Y DRIVE Assys.
Assy Name Ref No. Part Name Part Category Remarks

X DRIVE Assy IC1101 PS9818-1(P) Photo Coupler
IC1104 TND307TD FET Driver
IC1204 PS9818-2(P) Photo Coupler
Y DRIVE Assy IC2101 PS9818-1(P) Photo Coupler
IC2201 PS9818-1(P) Photo Coupler
B
TIME LAG ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTROL SIGNAL (SUS-B)

1 Measure the time lag for the SUS-U signal to the SUS-B signal.
2 Check the time lag for the SUS-B Gate signal to the SUS-U Gate siganl.
Adjust the variable control so that the time lag of Gate becomes " time lag of input signal + α ± 5 nsec."
Note: • Be sure to set the Drive to OFF for adjustment.
• For details on measuring points of waveform, see the figure below.
C
50 % of the crest value

SUS-U signal (input to the DRIVE Assy)
50 % of the crest value

SUS-B signal (input to the DRIVE Assy)
D time lag of SUS-U and SUS-B

Δ Tsus-iub
5 V position
SUS-U signal
X DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q1108)
Y DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q2107)
5 V position
SUS-B signal
X DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q1219)
Y DRIVE (Gate terminal of Q2218)
E time lag of SUS-U Gate and SUS-B Gate
Δ Tsus - gub
Time lag of SUS-U Gate and SUS-B Gate : Δ Tsus - gub

Adjust so that "Δ Tsus - gub = Δ Tsus - iub + α ± 5 nsec," using the variable
controls shown in the table below:
Assy VR Value of α
F X DRIVE Assy VR1002 60 nsec
Y DRIVE Assy VR2002 60 nsec
176 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A
DELAY ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTROL SIGNAL (SUS-D)
1 Measure the pulse width of the SUS-D signal.
2 Check the pulse width of the SUS-D input signal (gate terminal of Q2111).
Adjust the variable control so that the pulse width of the SUS-D input signal (gate terminal of Q2111) becomes the
same pulse width ± 5 nsec as the SUS-D signal.
Note: • For details on measuring points of waveform, see the figure below.
SUS-D pulse width

Tsus - D B
50 % of the crest value 50 % of the crest value
SUS-D signal
(input to the DRIVE Assy)
SUS-D pulse width
Tsus - Dg
C
50 % of the crest value 50 % of the crest value
SUS-D signal
(input to the gate terminal of Q2111)
SUS-D pulse width: Tsus - Dg

Adjust so that "Tsus - Dg = Tsus - D ± 5 nsec," using the variable D
control shown in the table below:
Assy VR
Y DRIVE Assy VR2001
PDP-5020FD 177
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
SUS-B ADJUSTMENT
X DRIVE Assy
TP1119
from IC1104 Q1108

DIGITAL Assy IGBT
IC1001_A1 IC1101 Q1104
Photo
XSUS-U
Pin Coupler
2 Q1116
IGBT
TP1127
2 Adjust the SUS-U and SUS-B input

B 1 Measure the SUS-U and SUS-B
delay time so that it becomes
input delay time (Δ Tsus - iub).
"Δ Tsus - iub + 60 ± 5 nsec."
TP1246
Q1204
Q1218
from IGBT
VR1002 IC1209
DIGITAL Assy TP1236
IC1001_A1 IC1204 Q1205
Photo Q1219
XSUS-B
Pin Coupler IGBT
2 TP1238
Q1207
Q1221
IGBT
C
Y DRIVE Assy TP2105
Q2106
IGBT
from IC2103
DIGITAL Assy TP2106
IC2001_A4 IC2101 Q2104
Photo Q2107
YSUS-U IGBT
Pin Coupler
5 TP2107
1 Measure the SUS-U and SUS-B 2 Adjust the SUS-U and SUS-B input Q2108
IGBT
input delay time (Δ Tsus - iub). delay time so that it becomes
TP2108
"Δ Tsus - iub + 60 ± 5 nsec."
D Q2109
IGBT
Q2204 TP2208
Q2217
from IGBT
VR2002 IC2203
DIGITAL Assy TP2209
IC2001_A6 IC2201 Q2205
Photo Q2218
YSUS-B
Pin Coupler IGBT
7 TP2210
Q2206
Q2219
IGBT
E
SUS-D ADJUSTMENT
Y DRIVE Assy 2 Adjust the pulse width (Tsus - Dg) of the SUS-D
input signal so that it becomes "Tsus-D ± 5 nsec."
1 Measure the SUS-D pulse width (Tsus - D).
TP2114
from VR2001 IC2104

DIGITAL Assy Q2111
IC2005_A7 Q2105 IGBT
YSUS-D
Pin
F 8 Q2113
IGBT
TP2116
178 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
8.6 HOW TO UPDATE USB
A
Preparation
Expand the image-file folder for USB updating in the root directory of the USB memory device.
Example: Folder construction after expansion in the root directory of the USB memory device
(With the nonencrypted [update]
folder) boot.img
update.ctl
update.iso
update.lst
(With the encrypted folder) [update] An encrypted image-file folder for USB updating
boot.img will be released for general users.
update.ctl
update.enc B
update.key
update.lst
Description of the figures

Status
Screen ON AC OFF Performing USB updating
LED LED
LED USB
memory
AC (ON) AC (OFF) device
Panel screen ON Panel screen OFF
LED lit LED unlit LEDs flashing alternately
Procedures C
1. Setting before USB updating

Change the power status of the Panel from Screen ON to AC OFF.
1
Panel screen ON
LED
Unplug the AC power cord.

2
AC OFF
D
LED
2. Performing USB updating

Connect the USB memory device then set the
unit to AC ON.
3 5
AC OFF Panel screen ON
LED LED
Connect the USB memory E

4 device. 6
Orange LED ON NEVER use the remote
AC OFF
LED control unit.
LED (Especially DO NOT use
the Power key.)
7
Plug in the AC power cord. System standby
LED
8
Performing USB updating
If you use any key on the remote control unit in Steps 5 and 7: F
LED
If the unit does not shift to Step 8, disconnect the USB memory device
then try the procedures from the beginning.
If the unit shifts to Step 8, continue the updating procedures as described.
PDP-5020FD 179
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A
3. Completion procedures for USB updating
After USB updating is completed, perform the following steps (unplug the AC power cord, disconnect the
USB memory device, then plug the AC power cord back in).
9
USB updating completed
LED
Unplug the AC power cord.

a
AC OFF
LED
B
b Disconnect the USB memory device.

AC OFF
LED
Plug in the AC power cord.

c
System standby
LED
C
Turn the unit on, using the Power key on the remote control unit
d
Screen ON
LED
The GUI indicating that updating is completed is displayed.
List of frequency of LED flashing (orange) when updating fails

If updating is interrupted, the orange LED flashes to warn you of the error.
D
USB updating completed

LED
Frequency of
Orange LED Error Content Details
Flashing
1 (Not used)
2 Version error The same version or a newer version of software has already been loaded.
3 USB update startup error Startup of USB updating failed.
4 DTV update error Updating of the DTV software failed.
E 5 Main download error Updating of the MAIN microcomputer software failed.
6 ARIA download error Updating of the ASIC software in the previous stage failed.
7 ZEUS download error Updating of the ASIC software in the later stage failed.
8 Module download error Updating of the module microcomputer software failed.
9 IF download error Updating of the IF microcomputer software failed.
10 USB disconnection Abnormality in the USB memory device
11 to 13 Reserved -
14 Destination error The software for a different destination (Europe/North America/Australia) was used for updating.
Example: In a case where the orange LED flashes twice (version error)
Repetition of 1-sec flashing twice followed by a 2.5-sec pause (OFF)
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
1 2 1 2
F
180 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
8.7 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE MAIN OR IO_AUDIO ASSY IS REPLACED
A
Explanation
To correct differences in IC output levels and signal levels upon AD conversion, adjustment is performed throughout
the path. Therefore, if any of the following devices is replaced, the entire adjustment must be performed again.
IC8001 AV_SW R2S11006FT

IC8101 RGB_SW R2S11001FT
IC4702 VDEC CM0048AF
IC4801 ADC AD9985KSTZ-110
B
Adjustment Procedure
Perform the "AUTO ADJUSTMENT" on the "6.2 [4] INITIALIZE".
PDP-5020FD 181
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
9. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST

NOTES: - Parts marked by “NSP” are generally unavailable because they are not in our Master Spare Parts List.
A
- The > mark found on some component parts indicates the importance of the safety factor of the part.
Therefore, when replacing, be sure to use parts of identical designation.
- Screws adjacent to b mark on product are used for disassembly.
- For the applying amount of lubricants or glue, follow the instructions in this manual.
(In the case of no amount instructions, apply as you think it appropriate.)
9.1 PACKING SECTION
Screws to Metal fittings

(M4 x 35 mm)
×2
E
Falling prevention
Metal fittings Cable clamps
×2 ×4
182 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
PACKING SECTION PARTS LIST

Mark No. Description Part No.
> 1 Power Cord (2 m/6.6 feet) ADG1215
2 Remote Control AXD1561 A
3 Battery Cover (Black) AZN2783
NSP 4 Alkaline Dry Cell Battery VEM1023
(LR6, AA)
5 Binder Assy AEC2158

6 Cleaning Cloth AED1285
7 Speaker System SMW2023
8 Operating Instructions ARE1488
(English / French / Spanish)
9 Caution Card ARM1239 B
10 Cleaning Caution (U) ARM1303

11 Power Button Caution ARM1390
NSP 12 Card (Register) ARY1215
NSP 13 Warranty Card KUC ARY1196
14 Polyethylene Bag AHG1394

15 Paper Angle (509U) AHB1301
16 Packing Sheet AHG1405
17 Pad (509 T-L U) AHA2707
18 Pad (509 T-R U) AHA2708
C
19 Pad (509 B-L REG) AHA2709

20 Pad (509 B-R REG) AHA2710
21 Upper Carton (5020FD) AHD3657
22 Under Carton (509U) AHD3671
23 Fall Prevention Steel Assy AXY1218
24 HD Sheet AHG1416
25 DIGITAL TV Trans Inf ARM1399
PDP-5020FD 183
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
9.2 REAR SECTION
POWER
SUPPLY
P8
MAIN CN4107
(USB)
MAIN JA4901
(HDMI)
IO_AUDIO
CN7505
MAIN
CN4209
Refer to
"9.3 FRONT SECTION".
184 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
REAR SECTION PARTS LIST

1 SIDE IO Assy AWW1356
2 SIDE KEY Assy AWW1361 A
3 POWER SW Assy AWW1366
4 SIDE HDMI Assy AWW1372
5 USB Cable (J301)(120 cm) ADF1034
6 HDMI Cable (J302)(1150 mm) ADF1037

7 3P Housing Wire (J103) ADX3630
9 USB Holder ANG3134
10 Side Input Base ANG3135
11 Side Input Shield ANG3136 B
12 Coil Spring ABH1125

13 Sensor Cushion B (428) AEB1486
NSP 14 PCB Spacer AEC1084
15 Edge Saddle AEC1571
16 Mini Clamp AEC1971

17 Inner Grip Assy AMR3693
18 Power Button Support AMR3763
> 19 USB Gasket ANK1962
20 Power Button Case AAK2927
C
21 Side Input Cover AMR3754

22 Operation Button AAC1569
23 Power Button (508F) AAD4152
24 Rear Case (509) ANE1671
25 Under Cover (509) ANE1672
NSP 26 Name Label (5020FD) AAL3029

NSP 27 Serial Seal AAX3182
28 Label A (U) AAX3566
29 Side Label (U) AAK2929 D
> 30 Ferrite Core (F15, F16) ATX1069
31 •••••
32 Screw (M3 x 6) ABA1377
33 Screw (M3 x 10) ABA1378
34 Screw (3 x 8 P) ABA1379
35 Screw (3 x 25 P) ABA1380
36 Screw AMZ30P060FTB
38 Screw APZ30P080FTB E
39 Screw BMZ30P080FTB
40 Screw BPZ30P080FTB
PDP-5020FD 185
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
9.3 FRONT SECTION
A
Refer to
"9.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)".
MAIN
CN4209
MAIN
CN4208
Rear view
186 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
FRONT SECTION PARTS LIST

1 LED Assy AWW1362
2 IR Assy AWW1363 A
3 RLS Assy AWW1365
4 7/3/3P Housing Wire (J117) ADX3643
5 Front Bezel (509TVU) AMB3099
6 Blind Cushion (508F) AEB1479

7 Nylon Rivet AEC1671
8 Rivet (Plastic) AEC1877
PDP-5020FD 187
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
9.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)
A
Refer to
"9.7 MULTIBASE SECTION".
Cleaning paper :
GED-008
FAN CONNECT
CN8762
FAN CONNECT
CN8762
D
FAN CONNECT
CN8763
FAN CONNECT
CN8763
Refer to
"9.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2)".
188 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
CHASSIS SECTION (1/2) PARTS LIST

> 1 DC FAN Motor 80 x 15L AXM1065
2 Sub Frame L Assy (50) ANA2137 A
3 Sub Frame R Assy (50) ANA2140
> 4 F. Chassis VL Assy 50 ANA2142
> 5 F. Chassis VR Assy 50 ANA2151
> 6 F. Chassis HT Assy 50 ANA2144

> 7 F. Chassis HB 50 ANA2188
8 Waterproof Cushion AEB1495
9 Wire Clip AEC1948
10 Reuse Wire Saddle AEC2134
11 Support Bracket AMR3762 B
12 FAN Bracket 80 AMR3787

> 13 Gasket ADH-FCH ANK1850
> 14 Front Gasket V50 ANK1963
> 15 Front Gasket H50 ANK1964
16 FC Gate Sheet AMR3906

17 Stand Cushion AED1340
18 Screw ABA1313
20 Screw ABZ30P080FTC
C
22 Screw APZ30P080FTB
23 Screw PPZ50P100FTB
24 Screw TBZ40P060FTC
PDP-5020FD 189
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
9.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2)
A
I
H
J
X
MAIN
CN4105
CN4101 Z
B A
F
E
C
U
D
C U
IO_AUDIO
CN7502 V
L
R
Q
X Z MAIN
K
CN4210
MAIN AC Inlet
CN4207 S
J
T
V
N
M
POWER SW
CN8776
D
Q O
P
E
I
W
L MAIN CN4202
H FAN
K
R FAN
T
E M A
F
B
N
O C
D
P
F
Refer to
"9.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION".
190 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
CHASSIS SECTION (2/2) PARTS LIST

1 SENSOR Assy AWW1340 46 FFC Sheet AMR3893

2 50F DIGITAL Assy AWW1347 > 47 Gasket (10 x 10 x 80) ANK1974 A
3 50F X DRIVE Assy AWV2546 > 48 Ferrite Core (L1) ATX1044
4 50F Y DRIVE Assy AWV2547 49 •••••
5 FAN CONNECT Assy AWW1364 50 Screw ABA1313
> 6 POWER SUPPLY Unit AXY1200 51 Screw ABA1364

> 7 Ferrite Core (F1 - F8) ATX1072 52 Screw ABZ30P060FTB
8 Flexible Cable (J201) ADD1540
11 Flexible Cable (J204) ADD1543 B


18 12P/11P Housing Wire (J101) ADX3628
C


29 Plate Y (509) ANG3127 D
31 Ferrite Core Holder AEC1818

32 Flat Clamp AEC1879
33 Wire Clip AEC1948
35 Reuse Card Spacer AEC2117
36 PCB Spacer (Reuse) AEC2122

37 Flat Clamp AEC2132
38 Reuse Fastener AEC2133 E
39 Reuse Wire Saddle AEC2134
40 Reuse PCB Spacer 4.5 AEC2148
41 Drive Sheet AEH1155

42 Y Drive Sheet B AMR3769
43 Y Drive Sheet C AMR3783
44 FAN Sheet AMR3786
45 Y Drive Sheet A (M) AMR3881
PDP-5020FD 191
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
9.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION
192 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
PANEL CHASSIS SECTION PARTS LIST

NSP 1 P. Chassis (509F) Assy AWU1293
NSP 2 50F ADDRESS L Assy AWW1348 A
NSP 3 50F ADDRESS S Assy AWW1349
NSP 4 50F SCAN A Assy AWW1350
NSP 5 50F SCAN B Assy AWW1351
NSP 6 P. Panel (50F) Assy AWU1294

7 Reuse PCB Spacer 4.5 AEC2148
8 Heat Radiation Sheet AEH1134
9 Plate Holder AMR3757
10 Holder L Assy (509) AMR3775
11 Holder S Assy (509) AMR3776 B
12 Address Plate S (509) ANG3129

13 Address Plate L (509) ANG3130
14 Plate X (509) ANG3128
15 PCB Spacer (Reuse) AEC2122
16 Address Silicon TS AEH1160

17 Address Silicon TL AEH1161
18 •••••
19 •••••
20 Screw ABA1351
C
21 Screw ABA1364
PDP-5020FD 193
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
9.7 MULTIBASE SECTION
RLS CN8736 POWER SUPPLY

IR CN8751 SIDE KEY CN8701 P6
LED CN8721
P7
USB (SIDE)
FAN CONNECT
CN8761
B SIDE IO
CN8601
CN3202 POWER
SUPPLY
CN3201 50F
A
P5
DIGITAL
HDMI
(SIDE)
POWER
E A SUPPLY
P3
194 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
MULTIBASE SECTION PARTS LIST

1 MAIN Assy AWW1371 > 49 Gasket B ANK1980

2 IO_AUDIO Assy AWW1352 > 50 Gasket (10 x 8 x 15) ANK1982 A
3 PC Assy AWW1359 51 Nylon Rivet AEC1671
> 4 Ferrite Core (F11, F12) ATX1048 52 •••••
> 5 AC Inlet (CN1) AKP1336 53 •••••
6 Flexible Cable (J211) ADD1533 54 Washer Faced Nut BBN1005

7 Flexible Cable (J212) ADD1534 55 Hexagon Headed Screw ABA1382
8 Flexible Cable (J213) ADD1535 56 Screw (M3 x 6) ABA1377
9 Flexible Cable (J214) ADD1536 57 Screw AMZ30P060FTB
10 Flexible Cable (J215) ADD1537 58 Screw BMP40P080FSN
> 11 Housing Wire (J105) ADX3608 59 Screw BMZ30P060FTB B
> 12 Housing Wire (J104) ADX3631 60 Screw BPZ30P080FTB

13 14P Housing Wire (J109) ADX3635 61 Screw PMB30P060FNI

18 Rubber Sheet AEB1498
19 Cushion AEB1499
20 Wire Saddle AEC1745
C
21 Wire Saddle AEC1797

22 Circuit Board Spacer AEC1872
23 Ferrite Stopper AEC1981
24 Reuse PCB Spacer 4.5 AEC2136 or AEC2161
25 PCB Spacer AEC2146
26 HDMI Clamp AEC2147

27 Clamp AEC2156
28 Edge Holder AEC2159
29 Silicon Sheet MTB A AEH1174 D
30 Silicon Sheet MTB B AEH1175
31 Cable Holder AMR3770

32 Sleeve AMR3771
33 Ether Cover AMR3789
34 MTB Assy ANA2150
35 1..T Panel U Assy ANC2468

36 2..Label B1 (U) AAX3571
37 2..Label B2 (U) AAX3582
38 2..Terminal Panel (U) ANC2463 E
39 Tuner Panel (U) ANG3146

40 HDMI Holder ANG3147
41 Earth BKT A ANG3182
42 Earth BKT C ANG3184
43 Gasket T ANK1965
44 Gasket 3 x 40 ANK1971
> 45 Gasket (10 x 10 x 80) ANK1974
46 Gasket (10 x 5 x 20) ANK1976
F
> 47 Gasket (U) ANK1977
48 Gasket A ANK1979
PDP-5020FD 195
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
9.8 PDP SERVICE ASSY
A
PDP SERVICE ASSY 509F : AWU1339
Exterior Section
Serial Label
196 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Packing Section
Serial Label
Caution Sheet (9G) Refer to the “• Exterior Section”

for the mounting position.
B
PDP SERVICE ASSY PARTS LIST

NSP 1 P. Chassis (509F) Assy AWU1293 26 Screw ABA1351

2 Sub Frame L Assy (50) ANA2137 27 Screw ABA1364
3 Sub Frame R Assy (50) ANA2140 28 Screw (3 x 25 P) ABA1380
> 4 F. Chassis VL Assy 50 ANA2142 29 Screw ABZ30P080FTC
> 5 F. Chassis VR Assy 50 ANA2151 30 Screw AMZ30P060FTB
D
> 6 F. Chassis HT Assy 50 ANA2144 31 Screw APZ30P080FTB
> 7 F. Chassis HB 50 ANA2188 32 Screw TBZ40P060FTC
8 Plate X (509) ANG3128 33 Stand Cushion AED1340
9 Address Plate S (509) ANG3129 34 •••••
10 Address Plate L (509) ANG3130 35 •••••
11 Rivet (Plastic) AEC1877 36 Caution Label AAX3031

12 PCB Spacer (Reuse) AEC2122 37 Vinyl Bag AHG1338
13 Address Silicon TS AEH1160 38 Pad (509 T-L EU) AHA2727
14 Address Silicon TL AEH1161 39 Pad (509 T-R EU) AHA2728
15 Support Bracket AMR3762 40 Pad (509 B-L EU) AHA2729 E
> 16 Gasket ADH-FCH ANK1850 41 Pad (509 B-R EU) AHA2730

> 17 Front Gasket V50 ANK1963 42 Carton Board (509) AHB1303
> 18 Front Gasket H50 ANK1964 43 Under Carton (5090) AHD3673
19 Service Pad AEC2105 44 Upper Carton (509F-SV) AHD3716
20 Ferrite Core Holder AEC1818 45 Protect Sheet AHG1331
21 Wire Clip AEC1948

> 22 Gasket (10 x 10 x 80) ANK1974
NSP 23 Front Service Assy (509) AMB3103
F
24 Rear Case (509) ANE1671
NSP 25 Drive Voltage Label ARW1097
PDP-5020FD 197
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
9.9 TABLE TOP STAND
Front
Bottom view
TABLE TOP STAND PARTS LIST

1 Base Cover AXY1176
2 Stand Pipe L AXY1208
3 Stand Pipe R AXY1209
E 4 Screw ABA1357
198 PDP-5020FD
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9.10 SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING)
SPEAKER SYSTEM : SMW2023 A
Top
Front Side
B
Top
Speaker system
Front
Front Side
×2 C
SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING) PARTS LIST

NSP 1 1..Accessory Set SME3854 16 Protector (SIDE) SHA2602

2 2..Speaker Cable SDS1202 17 Protector (C-T) SHA2603
3 2..Polyethylene Bag S1 SHL1439 18 Protector (C-M) SHA2604
NSP 4 2..Screw Set SME3853 19 Protector (C-B) SHA2605
5 3..Speaker Mounting Screw SBA1292 NSP 20 Inner Carton Board SHB1192 E
6 3..Polyethylene Bag S0 SHL1438
21 Protection Sheet S1 SHC1869
7 1..Speaker Bracket (Side) SXG1158 22 Protection Sheet S3 SHC1875
8 2..Gasket SED1182 23 Packing Case SHG2816
9 2..Gasket SED1183 24 Packing Bag S2 SHL1450
NSP 10 2..Bracket S SNA1493 25 Polyethylen Bag S0 SHL1451
11 1..Speaker Bracket (Center) SXG1159 NSP 26 Label Serial SRW1112

12 2..Gasket SED1184
13 2..Gasket SED1185
14 2..Gasket SED1186 F
NSP 15 2..Bracket C SNA1494
PDP-5020FD 199
5 6 7 8
F
E
B
A
D
C
(Top)
200
Cabinet (inside)
1
1
TW
TW
WF
WF
WF
WF
TW
TW
(Top)
Grille (Front) Baffle (Front)
9.11 SPEAKER SYSTEM
2
2
Section: A
PDP-5020FD
Inside Outside
Rear Section: B
3
3
(Top)
Tweeter
Input Terminal
Input Terminal
TW
WF
4
4
Grille (back) Baffle (back)

(Top)
WF
TW
5 6 7 8
BAFFLE
CS ASSY PARTS LIST

1 Speaker H132DC65-53D 24 Tape SEH1099

2 Speaker FK26AP32-58H 25 Tape SEH1115
NSP 3 Baffle SNK3032 26 Input Terminal SKX1098
NSP 4 Cabinet Assy C SXG1155 NSP 27 MDF Bar SLX1176
NSP 5 Cabinet Assy L SXG1156 NSP 28 Paper Tube 26 SMR1403
D
NSP 6 Cabinet Assy R SXG1157 NSP 29 Acoustic Absorbent SMT1328
7 Grille SMG1894 NSP 30 Acoustic Absorbent SMT1331
8 1..Network Ass’y SWN1792 NSP 31 Acoustic Absorbent SMT1333
2..Capacitor 1.5 SCE1034 NSP 32 Acoustic Absorbent SMT1335
2..Choke Coil 0.47 STH1269 NSP 33 Acoustic Absorbent SMT1357
NSP 34 Acoustic Absorbent SMT1359
NSP 9 Gasket SEB1299
NSP 10 Gasket SEB1300 NSP 35 Model Label SAN4025
NSP 11 Blinder SEB1304 NSP 36 Caution Label SRR1032
NSP 12 Gasket SEC2074 NSP 37 Label Serial SRW1111
13 Gasket SEC2083 38 Screw BPZ30P080FTC E
39 Screw BPZ35P080FTC
NSP 14 Gasket SEC2197
NSP 15 Gasket SEC2201 40 Screw BPZ35P120FTC
NSP 16 Gasket SEC2203 41 Screw BPZ35P140FTB
NSP 17 Gasket SEC2204 42 Screw BPZ40P350FTC
NSP 18 Gasket SEC2205 43 Screw SBA1291

NSP 21 Felt SED1127
F
NSP 22 Felt SED1130
23 Tape SEH1089
PDP-5020FD 201
5 6 7 8

Pioneer Pdp-5020fd SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pioneer Pdp-5020fd SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pioneer Pdp-5020fd SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the safety precautions mentioned in the manual?

What are the safety precautions mentioned in the manual?

What parts are listed for the table top stand?

What parts are listed for the table top stand?

ORDER NO.

PDP-5020FD KUCXC AC 120 V

For details, refer to "Important Check Points for good servicing".

PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

Also test with

1 Use specified parts for repair.

Use genuine parts. Be sure to use important parts for safety.

2 Do not perform modifications without proper instructions.

3 Make sure the soldering of repaired locations is properly performed.

4 Make sure the screws are tightly fastened.

5 Make sure each connectors are correctly inserted.

9 There should be no spark traces or similar marks on the power plug.

a Safe environment should be secured during servicing.

5. Shipping mode and Shipping screws

Do NOT use a soldering iron whose tip temperature cannot be controlled.

The following lead-free solders are available as service parts:

1.2 CHARGED SECTION AND HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING POINT

: Part is Charged Section.

Fig. High Voltage Generating Point (Rear view)

Remote control Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet)

C Fall Prevention Steel Assy

Screws to Metal Fittings (2) Falling Prevention

Warranty card Operating instructions (ARE1488)

2.3 PANEL FACILITIES

3. BASIC ITEMS FOR SERVICE

No. Procedures Item to be checked

Name Part No. Remarks

Cleaning paper GED-008 Used to fan cleaning.

3.2 QUICK REFERENCE

Quick Reference upon Service Visit 1

Notes when visiting for service PD/SD Subcategory confirmation procedure

UNKNOWN Red 15 4 SD (1-15)

Quick Reference upon Service Visit 2

PANEL FACTORY mode OPTION mode INITIALIZE mode

To "Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 2"

3.3 PCB LOCATIONS

50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS S

50F ADDRESS S 50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS L 50F ADDRESS L

PC Assy IO_AUDIO Assy

RLS Assy LED Assy D

NSP 50F SCAN A ASSY AWW1350 IO_AUDIO ASSY AWW1352

SENSOR ASSY AWW1340 IR ASSY AWW1363

PDP SERVICE ASSY 509F AWU1339

3.4 JIGS LIST

Name Jig No. Remarks

4.2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)

4.3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)

SCAN IC VC_U +17V VSNOFS

VH IC5V IC5V BLOCK Drive

VH IC5V SUS SUS Drive Signal

IC5V BLOCK STB3.4V

SCAN IC IC5V VYPRST Q202

SCAN B ASSY SENSOR

V+2_5V_D V+1_2V_D V+3_3V_D